- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi
- Inverter
- FR-B-750-400V
- Instruction Manual
Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2 PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2 PDF
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
FR-B, B3 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC) FR-B-750 to 75K(200V), FR-B-750 to 110K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H) 400 to 37K
PRESSURE-RESISTANT, EXPLOSION-PROOF MOTOR DRIVING INVERTER
IB(NA)-0600271ENG-B(0902)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
FR -B
, B 3
PR ESSU
R E-R
ESISTA N
T, EXPLO SIO
N -PR
O O
F M O
TO R
D R
IVIN G
IN VER
TER IN
STR U
C TIO
N M
A N
U A
L (B A
SIC )
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
(A700 SPECIFICATIONS)
Be sure to perform offline auto tuning in the motor running mode and operate with the advanced magnetic flux vector control when using the FR-B3 series.
CONTENTS
PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION.............................. 1
INSTALLATION AND WIRING...................................................................... 2 2.1 Peripheral devices..................................................................................................... 3 2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover ........................................... 5 2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions ............................................................... 7 2.4 Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 8 2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units .................................................................. 27 2.6 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)................................................................. 36 2.7 Precautions for use of the inverter.......................................................................... 37 2.8 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter....................................................... 39
DRIVE THE MOTOR.................................................................................... 40 3.1 Step of operation..................................................................................................... 40 3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07).................................................................................... 41 3.3 Before operation...................................................................................................... 49 3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode) ..................................... 58 3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation) ..................................... 63 3.6 Parameter List......................................................................................................... 70
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................... 104 4.1 Reset method of protective function ..................................................................... 104 4.2 List of fault or alarm display .................................................................................. 105 4.3 Causes and corrective actions.............................................................................. 106 4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters .................................... 119 4.5 Check and clear of the faults history..................................................................... 120 4.6 Check first when you have a trouble..................................................................... 122
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ..................... 125 5.1 Inspection item...................................................................................................... 125
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 132 6.1 FR-B Series Specifications ................................................................................... 132 6.2 FR-B3 Series Specifications ................................................................................. 134 6.3 Outline dimension drawings.................................................................................. 136
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor driving inverter. This Instruction Manual (basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter". If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction Manual (applied) [IB-0600272ENG]. The Instruction Manual (applied) is separately available from where you purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi sales representative.
1
2
3
4
5
6
MODEL FR-B, B3 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
MODEL CODE 1A2P29
A-1
This instruction manual (basic) provides handling information and precautions for use of the equipment. Please forward this instruction manual (basic) to the end user.
4. Additional Instructions Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
This section is specifically about safety matters Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through this instruction manual (basic) and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this instruction manual (basic), the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only.
Note that even the level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow strictly the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety. 1. Electric Shock Prevention
While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.
Even if power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection.You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
Before starting wiring or inspection, check to make sure that the operation panel indicator is off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and it is dangerous.
This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards) Use a neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard.
Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do the work.
Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured.
Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not replace the cooling fan while power is on. It is dangerous to replace the cooling fan while power is on.
Do not touch the printed circuit board with wet hands. You may get an electric shock. When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity, the DC voltage is applied to
the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering off to prevent an electric shock.
2. Fire Prevention Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall without holes (so that nobody can
touch the inverter heatsink on the rear side, etc.). Mounting it to or near flammable material can cause a fire.
If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire.
When using a brake resistor, make up a sequence that will turn off power when an alarm signal is output. Otherwise, the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+, N/. This could cause a fire.
3. Injury Prevention Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal.
Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur. Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, burst,
damage, etc. may occur. Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage, etc. Otherwise,
burst, damage, etc. may occur. While power is on or for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter as it
is hot and you may get burnt.
(1) Transportation and installation
Since the inverter is non-explosion-proof, always install it in a non-hazardous place. Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the
inverter. Install according to the information in the instruction manual. Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts missing. This can
result in breakdowns. When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may
fall off or fail. Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product. Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct. Prevent other conductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other
flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter. As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact. Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions. Otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged.
WARNING CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
En vi
ro nm
en t Surrounding air temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature -20C to +65C *1 Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas,
flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude, vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
(2) Wiring Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge suppressor/radio
noise filter (capacitor type filter) on the inverter output side. The device on the inverter output side may be overheated or burn out.
The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the motor.
(3) Test operation and adjustment
For the FR-B3 series, operate with Advanced magnetic flux vector control after performing offline auto tuning.
Before starting operation, confirm and adjust the parameters. A failure to do so may cause some machines to make unexpected motions.
(4) Operation Since this inverter is used in combination with the Mitsubishi inverter-driven,
pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor, note the driven motor used with the inverter.
Note that this inverter cannot be used with the Mitsubishi increased-safety, explosion-proof motor.
When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
Since pressing key may not stop output depending on the function setting status (refer to page 81), provide a circuit and switch separately to make an emergency stop (power off, mechanical brake operation for emergency stop, etc).
Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the inverter as well as equipment.
Do not modify the equipment. Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so
may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee protection of the motor from overheating. It is recommended to install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for overheat protection.
Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/ stopping of the inverter. Otherwise, the life of the inverter decreases.
Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/damage the power factor correction capacitor and generator.
When parameter clear or all clear is performed, reset the required parameters before starting operations. Each parameter returns to the initial value.
The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure safety.
Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always perform inspection and test operation.
For prevention of damage due to static electricity, touch nearby metal before touching this product to eliminate static electricity from your body.
(5) Emergency stop Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the
machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails. When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short
circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
Treat as industrial waste.
General instructions Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual (basic) show the inverter without a cover, or partially open. Never run the inverter in this status. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual (basic) when operating the inverter.
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
I
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION 1
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2
2.1 Peripheral devices ................................................................................................. 3 2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover ......................................... 5 2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions............................................................. 7 2.4 Wiring..................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................... 8 2.4.2 EMC filter................................................................................................................................... 9 2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 10 2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring. ........ 10 2.4.5 Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 19 2.4.6 Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 22 2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit ............................................................................................................ 24 2.4.8 Connecting the operation panel using a connection cable ...................................................... 25 2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 25 2.4.10 Communication operation........................................................................................................ 26 2.4.11 USB connector ........................................................................................................................ 26
2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units................................................................ 27 2.5.1 Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR)
(22K or less) ............................................................................................................................ 27 2.5.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) ................................................................................... 30 2.5.3 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)....................................................................... 32 2.5.4 Connection of the high power factor converter (MT-HC)(FR-B-75K or more) ......................... 34 2.5.5 Connection of power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (FR-B-75K or more)........................... 35 2.5.6 Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL) ............................................ 35
2.6 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) .............................................................. 36 2.7 Precautions for use of the inverter ....................................................................... 37 2.8 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter .................................................... 39
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR 40
3.1 Step of operation.................................................................................................. 40 3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07)................................................................................. 41
3.2.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07).................................................................................. 41 3.2.2 Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 42 3.2.3 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s)) ...................................................... 43 3.2.4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage ...................................................................... 44 3.2.5 First priority monitor ................................................................................................................. 44 3.2.6 Setting dial push ...................................................................................................................... 44 3.2.7 Changing the parameter setting value..................................................................................... 45 3.2.8 Parameter clear, all parameter clear ....................................................................................... 46 3.2.9 Parameter copy and parameter verification............................................................................. 47
CONTENTS
II
C O
N T
E N
T S
3.3 Before operation .................................................................................................. 49 3.3.1 Simple mode parameter list ..................................................................................................... 49 3.3.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9) .......................................................... 50 3.3.3 Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) ........................................... 51 3.3.4 Change acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)........................................................ 52 3.3.5 Selection of the start command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79) .......................... 53 3.3.6 Before operating the FR-B3 series (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 80, Pr.81, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96) .................................................................................... 54
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode) ................................... 58 3.4.1 Set the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)............................ 58 3.4.2 Use the setting dial like a potentiometer to perform operation. ............................................... 59 3.4.3 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed setting) ....... 60 3.4.4 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input) ............................................................... 61 3.4.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input) ............................................................... 62
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)................................... 63 3.5.1 Use the set frequency set by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3) ................................................ 63 3.5.2 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command
(multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6) ........................................................................................ 64 3.5.3 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input) ............................................................... 66 3.5.4 Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer
(at 5V, initial value) .................................................................................................................. 67 3.5.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input) ............................................................... 68 3.5.6 Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer
(at 20mA, initial value) ............................................................................................................. 69
3.6 Parameter List...................................................................................................... 70 3.6.1 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................... 70
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 104
4.1 Reset method of protective function .................................................................. 104 4.2 List of fault or alarm display ............................................................................... 105 4.3 Causes and corrective actions........................................................................... 106 4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters .................................. 119 4.5 Check and clear of the faults history.................................................................. 120 4.6 Check first when you have a trouble.................................................................. 122
4.6.1 Motor does not start............................................................................................................... 122 4.6.2 Motor generates abnormal noise........................................................................................... 122 4.6.3 Motor generates heat abnormally.......................................................................................... 122 4.6.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction ........................................................................................ 123 4.6.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting.................................................................................... 123 4.6.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth................................................................................ 123 4.6.7 Motor current is large............................................................................................................. 123 4.6.8 Speed does not increase....................................................................................................... 123 4.6.9 Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 123 4.6.10 Operation mode is not changed properly .............................................................................. 124 4.6.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 124 4.6.12 POWER lamp is not lit ........................................................................................................... 124 4.6.13 Parameter write cannot be performed ................................................................................... 124
III
5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 125
5.1 Inspection item................................................................................................... 125 5.1.1 Daily inspection ..................................................................................................................... 125 5.1.2 Periodic inspection ................................................................................................................ 125 5.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection................................................................................................. 126 5.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 127 5.1.5 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 128 5.1.6 Replacement of parts ............................................................................................................ 128 5.1.7 Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 131
6 SPECIFICATIONS 132
6.1 FR-B Series Specifications ................................................................................ 132 6.1.1 FR-B series ratings................................................................................................................ 132 6.1.2 FR-B series common specifications ...................................................................................... 133
6.2 FR-B3 Series Specifications .............................................................................. 134 6.2.1 FR-B3 series ratings.............................................................................................................. 134 6.2.2 FR-B3 series common specifications .................................................................................... 135
6.3 Outline dimension drawings............................................................................... 136 6.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings ...................................................................................... 136
APPENDICES 141
Appendix 1For customers who are replacing the older model with this inverter...................................................................................................... 141
Appendix 1-1Replacement of the FR-B,B3 series (A500 specifications) ........................................... 141
Harmonic suppression guideline All models of general-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". (For further details, refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
1
1
PR O
D U
C T
C H
EC K
IN G
A N
D P
A R
TS ID
EN TI
FI C
AT IO
N
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
REMARKS For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to page 5.
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
Front cover
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
Control circuit
terminal block
AU/PTC switchover switch
Main circuit terminal block
Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied
with power.
Cooling fan
PU connector
RS-485 terminals
Connector for plug-in option connection (Refer to the instruction manual of options.) There are three connection connectors and they are called CON. 1, CON. 2, and CON. 3 from above.
Alarm lamp
Lit when the inverter is
in the alarm status
(major fault).
Capacity plate
Inverter type Serial number
Capacity plate
Rating plate
Combed shaped wiring cover
Voltage/current input switch
Charge lamp Lit when power is supplied to the main circuit
FR- B - 3700
Indicate capacity(kW)
Symbol Inverter Capacity
Indicate capacity(W)
5.5K to 110K
750 to 3700
Indicate capacity(kW)
Symbol Voltage Class
Indicate capacity(W)
5.5K to 37K
750 to 3700
FR B3- - - 3700N H
400V Class
Voltage Class
200V Class
H
None
Symbol
Low noise
Symbol Noise
Standard
N
None
As the name of the FR-B series does not include a symbol indicating voltage class, check the voltage class with the input rating on the rating plate.
USB connector
FR-B-3700
Inverter Type
Rating plate Inverter type
Input rating Output rating
Serial number
FR-B-3700 Applied motor
capacity
(Refer to page 21)
(Refer to page 41)
(Refer to page 9)
(Refer to page 10)
(Refer to page 129) (Refer to page 25)
(Refer to page 19)
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Accessory DC reactor supplied (75K or more) Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (30K or more)
Capacity Eyebolt size Number 30K M8 2
37K to 110K M10 2
(Refer to page 13)
(Refer to page 10)
(Refer to page 5)
(Refer to page 8)
(Refer to page 26)
2
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CAUTION Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side. This will cause the
inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected, immediately remove them. Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference. (Refer to the chapter 2 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
Noise filter
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
Motor
Devices connected to the output
AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
DC reactor
(FR-HEL)
Install a noise filter to reduce
the electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 1MHz to 10MHz.
A wire should be wound 4T at
a maximum.
Power supply harmonics can be greatly suppressed. Install this as required.
Great braking capability is obtained. Install this as required. The regenerative braking
capability of the inverter can be exhibited fully. Install this as required.
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter.
Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
earth leakage current breaker (ELB),
fuse
The breaker must be selected carefully
since an in-rush current flows in the inverter
at power on.
Magnetic contactor (MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will
cause the inverter life to be shorten.
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL option)
Reactors (option) must be used when power
harmonics measures are taken, the power factor is
to be improved or the inverter is installed near a
large power supply system (1000kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use
reactors. Select the reactor according to the model.
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker.
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P1P/+ N/-P/+ U WV
High power factor converter
(MT-HC*1)
Power regeneration converter (MT-RC*1)
Resistor unit
(FR-BR, MT-BR5*1)
Brake unit
(FR-BU2, FR-BU, MT-BU5*1)
P/+
PR
*1 Compatible with the 75K or more.
to the 55K or less.
Noise filter
(FR-BLF)
Earth (Ground)
Earth (Ground)
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the
motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise
from the power line of the inverter, it is recommended
to wire the earth (ground) cable by returning it to the
earth (ground) terminal of the inverter.
Remove the jumpers across terminals P/+ - P1
to connect the DC reactor
The 55K or less has a built-in common mode choke.
For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
High-duty brake resistor
(FR-ABR*2)
Braking capability of the inverter built-
in brake can be improved. Remove
the jumper across terminal PR-PX
when connecting the high-duty brake
resistor. (7.5K or less)
Always install a thermal relay when
using a brake resistor whose capacity
is 11K or more.
*2 Compatible with the 22K or less.
USB connector
A personal computer and an inverter can
be connected with a USB (Ver1. 1) cable.(Refer to page 132)
(Refer to page 3)
(Refer to page 36)
(Refer to the chapter 2 of the Instruction Manual (applied)) )
Inverter (FR-B,B3) The life of the inverter is influenced by surrounding air temperature. The surrounding air temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 7) Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit to protect them from noise.(Refer to page 8) Refer to page 9 for the built-in EMC filter.
(Refer to page 26)
(Refer to page 27)
3
Peripheral devices
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.1 Peripheral devices Check the inverter type of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
200V class
Motor Output (kW)*1
Applicable Inverter Type Breaker Selection*2 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Reactor connection Reactor connection FR-B FR-B3 without with without with
0.4 FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)400 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10 0.75 FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)750 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10 1.5 FR-B-1500 FR-B3-(N)1500 30AF 15A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10 2.2 FR-B-2200 FR-B3-(N)2200 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10 3.7 FR-B-3700 FR-B3-(N)3700 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20, N21 S-N10 5.5 FR-B-5.5K FR-B3-(N)5.5K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N25 S-N20, N21 7.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)7.5K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N25 11 FR-B-11K FR-B3-(N)11K 100AF 75A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N35 15 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)15K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50
18.5 FR-B3-(N)18.5K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50 22 FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)22K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65 30 FR-B-30K FR-B3-(N)30K 225AF 225A 225AF 175A S-N95 S-N80 37 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)37K 400AF 250A 225AF 225A S-N150 S-N125 45 FR-B-45K 400AF 300A 400AF 300A S-N180 S-N150 55 FR-B-55K 400AF 400A 400AF 350A S-N220 S-N180 75 FR-B-75K 400AF 400A S-N300
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor with power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity. Install one MCCB per inverter.
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select the MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
CAUTION When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter type and cable and reactor according to the motor output. When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
MCCB INV
MCCB INV
IM
IM
4
Peripheral devices
400V class
Motor Output (kW)*1
Applicable Inverter Type Breaker Selection*2 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Reactor connection Reactor connection FR-B FR-B3 without with without with
0.4 FR-B-750
FR-B3-(N)H400 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10 0.75 FR-B3-(N)H750 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10 1.5 FR-B-1500 FR-B3-(N)H1500 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10 2.2 FR-B-2200 FR-B3-(N)H2200 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10 3.7 FR-B-3700 FR-B3-(N)H3700 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10 5.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H5.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 20A S-N20, N21 S-N11, N12 7.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H7.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20, N21 S-N20, N21 11 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H11K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N20, N21 S-N20, N21 15 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H15K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N20, N21
18.5 FR-B3-(N)H18.5K 100AF 75A 100AF 60A S-N25 S-N25 22 FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)H22K 100AF 100A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N25 30 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H30K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50 37 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H37K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50 45 FR-B-55K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65 55 FR-B-55K 225AF 200A 225AF 175A S-N80 S-N80 75 FR-B-75K 225AF 225A S-N95 90 FR-B-90K 225AF 225A S-N150 110 FR-B-110K 225AF 225A S-N180
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor with power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity. Install one MCCB per inverter.
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select the MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
CAUTION When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter type and cable and reactor according to the motor output. When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
MCCB INV
MCCB INV
IM
IM
5
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel. (These screws cannot be removed.)
2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the operation panel.
22K or less Removal
Reinstallation
Installation hook
Front cover Front cover
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover.
2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover Front cover
Front cover
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter. (Although installation can be done with the operation panel mounted, make sure that a connector is securely fixed.)
3) Tighten the installation screws and fix the front cover.
6
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
30K or more Removal
Reinstallation
CAUTION 1. Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover. 2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front
cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
Front cover 2
Front cover 1
Installation hook
1) Remove installation screws on the front cover 1 to remove the front cover 1.
2) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover 2.
3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to remove by pushing an installation hook on the right side using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover 2 Front cover 2
Front cover 2 Front cover 1
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely press the front cover 2 against the inverter. (Although installation can be done with the operation panel mounted, make sure that a connector is securely fixed.)
3) Fix the front cover 2 with the installation screws.
4) Fix the front cover 1 with the installation screws.
REMARKS For the FR-B-55K(200V class) or more, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.
7
Installation of the inverter and instructions
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions
As the inverter does not have an explosion proof structure, install it in a non-hazardous place.
Installation of the Inverter
Install the inverter under the following conditions.
The inverter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure.
Enclosure surface mounting 22K or less 30K or more CAUTION
When encasing multiple inverters, install them in parallel as a cooling measure.
Install the inverter vertically.
* Refer to the clearances below.
Vertical
*
Surrounding air temperature and humidity
Measurement position
Measurement position
Inverter5cm 5cm
5cm
Temperature: -10C to 50C
Humidity: 90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearances
and take cooling measures.
Clearances (Side)
5cm or more Inverter
Clearances (Front)
55K or less 75K or more 20cm or more
20cm or more
10cm or more
10cm or more
10cm or more
10cm or more
5cm or more
5cm or more
*1cm or more for 3.7K or less
**
*1cm or more for 3.7K or less
*
Direct sunlight High temperature,
high humidity
Horizontal placement
Mounting to
flammable material
Oil mist, flammable
gas, corrosive gas,
fluff, dust, etc.
Transportation by
holding the front cover
Vertical mounting
(When installing two or more inverters, install them in parallel.)
Vibration(5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes))
8
Wiring
2.4 Wiring 2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram
CAUTION It is mandatory to use the Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor with the inverter which has been approved for
combination by the Labor Ministry's explosion-proof certification. Therefore, always use the Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor in combination with its approved driving inverter.
To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables. Also separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Set the voltage/current input switch in right position. Operation with a wrong setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
PC
10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
(Analog common)
2 3
1
1
4
FM
SD
Jumper
C1
B1
A1
U
V
W
P1
+ -
AM
5 0 to 10VDC
*1
*9
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
MC
Main circuit
Control circuit
C2
B2
A2
IM
0 to 20mADC
AU
PTC
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
SG GND
S IN
K
S O
U R
C E
*4
*3
*5
*11
STF
STR
STOP
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
(+) (-)
5
ON
OFF
VCC
(+) (-)
5V
*11. FM terminal can be used for pulse train output of open collector output using Pr.291.
*2
Earth (Ground)
*9.FR-B-750(200V), FR-B3-(N)400, 750 are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (Always on)
R
PX PR N/-P/+
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Sink logic
Three-phase AC
power supply
MCCB
Jumper
Earth
(Ground)
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter
Earth (Ground)
24VDC power supply
(Common for external power supply transistor)
selected
selected0 to 5VDC *5
4 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
selected *5
Option connector 1
Option connector 2
Option connector 3
Connector
for plug-in option
connection
Frequency setting signal (Analog)
Frequency setting
potentiometer 1/2W1k
*6
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) Forward rotation
start Reverse rotation
start
Start self- holding selection
Terminal functions vary with
the input terminal
assignment (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Multi-speed
selection
Jog mode
Second function selection
Output stop
Reset
Terminal 4 input selection (Current input selection)
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure
Contact input common
PU
connector
Terminating resistor
Data reception
Data transmission
RS-485 terminals
(+)
(-) (0 to 10VDC)
Analog signal output
Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale
(Frequency meter, etc.)
Indicator
Calibration
resistor *10
Open collector output common
Sink/source common
Frequency detection
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous power failure
Overload
Terminal functions
vary with the output
terminal assignment
(Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Open collector output
(Permissible load
current 100mA)
Relay output 2
Relay output 1
(Fault output)
Terminal functions
vary with the output
terminal assignment
(Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
Relay output
Explosion-proof
motor
*4. AU terminal can be
used as PTC input
terminal.
*2. To supply power to the control circuit separately, remove the jumper across R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*10. It is not necessary when calibrating the indicator from the operation panel.
*6. It is recommended to use 2W1k
when the frequency setting signal
is changed frequently.
Jumper
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
ON 4 2
OFF
Voltage/current input switch
*5
Auxiliary input
Terminal 4 input
(Current input)
USB
connector
*5. Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications switchover (Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V) and ON to select current input (4 to 20mA).
*8. Brake resistor (FR-ABR) Remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX when connecting a brake resistor. (7.5K or less) Terminal PR is provided for the 22K or less. Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
Brake unit
(Option)
CN8
*7
r
*7. A CN8 (for MT-BU5) connector is provided
with the 75K or more.
*8
R
*3. JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to select JOG/pulse.
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL) Be sure to connect the DC reactor
supplied with the 75K or more. When a DC reactor is connected to the 55K or less, remove the jumper across P1-P/+.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
(Refer to the Instruction Manual (applied))
(Refer to page 27)
9
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.4.2 EMC filter This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and common mode choke. The EMC filter is effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter. The EMC filter is disabled (OFF) in the initial setting. To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position. The input side common mode choke, built-in the 55K or less inverter, is always valid regardless of on/off of the EMC filter connector.
The FR-B-750(200V class), FR-B3-(N)400, (N)750 are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (The EMC filter is always valid.)
(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is off, wait for
at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. (Refer to page 5.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely. If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.
CAUTION Fit the connector to either ON or OFF.
Enabling (turning on) the EMC filter increase leakage current. (Refer to the chapter 3 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
WARNING While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
EMC filter OFF EMC filter OFF EMC filter OFFEMC filter ON EMC filter ON EMC filter ON (initial setting) (initial setting) (initial setting)
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector
VU W
3700 or less 5.5K, 7.5K 11K or more
FR-B-1500 to 3700 (200V/400V class) FR-B3-(N)(H)1500 to 3700
FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K (200V class) FR-B-7.5K (400V class) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K
FR-B-11K(200V class) FR-B-15K(400V class) FR-B3-(N)11K FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15k
FR-B-15K, 22K(200V class) FR-B-22K(400V class) FR-B3-(N)15k,22K FR-B3-(N)H18.5k,22k
FR-B-30K or more (200V class) FR-B-37K or more (400V class) FR-B3-(N)(H) 30K or more
EMC filter
ON/OFF connector
(Side view)
Disengage connector fixing tab With tab disengaged,
pull up connector straight.
10
Wiring
2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal
*1 Supports capacities of the FR-B-75K or more.
2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring.
200V class
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC power input Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter (MT-HC)*1.
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor.
R1/L11, S1/L21
Power supply for control circuit
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the fault display and fault output or when using the high power factor converter (MT-HC)*1, remove the jumpers from terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/ L21 and apply external power to these terminals. Do not turn off the power supply for control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21) with the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may damage the inverter. The circuit should be configured so that the main circuit power (R/ L1, S/L2, T/L3) is also turned off when the power supply for control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21) is off.
P/+, PR Brake resistor connection (22K or less)
Remove the jumper from terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) and connect an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR. For the 22K or less, connecting the resistor further provides regenerative braking power.
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU and MT-BU5*1), high power factor converter (MT-HC)*1 or power regeneration converter (MT-RC)*1.
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection
For the 55K or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ - P1 and connect the DC reactor. (For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied as standard.)
PR, PX Built-in brake circuit connection
When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (initial status), the built-in brake circuit is valid. (Provided for the 7.5K or less.)
Earth (ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)400, 750
FR-B-1500, 2200, 3700 FR-B3-(N)1500, 2200, 3700
11K or less 15K 18.5K or more 200V class 60VA 80VA 80VA 400V class 60VA 60VA 80VA
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+
PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
As this is an inside cover fixing screw,
do not remove it.
Jumper Screw size (M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
Power supply
IM Explosion- proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
IM Charge lamp
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
Power supply
Explosion-proof motor
11
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K FR-B3-(N)5.5K, 7.5K
* Screw size of terminal R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, and PX is M4.
FR-B-11K FR-B3-(N)11K
FR-B-15K, 22K FR-B3-(N)15K, 18.5K, 22K
FR-B-30K, 37K, 45K FR-B3-(N)30K, 37K
FR-B-55K FR-B-75K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size
(M5)
Screw size (M5)
Jumper Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply
* * *
*
Explosion- proof motor
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
PR
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
Power supply
IM Explosion- proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
PR
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply Explosion-proof motor
Screw size
(15K:M6, 18.5K/22K:M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply
Explosion- proof motor
Screw size
(30K:M6, 37K/45K:M8)
Screw size
(30K:M8, 37K/45K:M10)
Power supply
IM Screw size (M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
Screw size (M12)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M4)R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
Explosion-proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M12)
Screw size (M10)
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
DC reactor Explosion-proof motor
12
Wiring
400V class FR-B-750 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700
FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H5.5K 7.5K
FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15K
FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
IM Charge lamp
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
Power supply
Explosion-proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply Explosion- proof motor
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
PR
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
Power supply
IM Explosion- proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
PR
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply Explosion-proof motor
13
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H30K, 37K
FR-B-55K
FR-B-75K, 90K FR-B-110K
CAUTION The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.) Never connect
the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter. Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
Handling of the wiring cover (FR-B-15K,22K(200V), FR-B-22K(400V), FR-B3-(N)15K, 18.5K, 22K, FR-B3-(N)H 18.5K, 22K) For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary parts using a pair of long-nose pliers etc.
IM
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size(M4)
Power supply
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
Explosion- proof motor
Screw size
(30K: M6, 37K: M8)
Screw size (30K: M6, 37K: M8)
IM
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp Screw size (M4)
Power supply
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M8) Screw size (M10) Screw size (M8)
Screw size (M8)
Explosion- proof motor
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
DC reactor
Screw size (M4)
Power supply
Jumper
Charge lamp
P/+
Screw size
(M10)
Screw size(M10)
Explosion-proof motor
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M10)
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
Power supply
DC reactor
Screw size (M10)
Explosion-proof motor
CAUTION Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where no wire is put through has been cut off (10mm or more), protective structure (JEM1030) becomes an open type (IP00).
14
Wiring
(1) Cable sizes etc., of the main control circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminals Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m. 200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
Applicable Inverter Type Terminal Screw Size *2
Tightening Torque Nm
Crimping Terminal
Cable Sizes HIV, etc. (mm2) *1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1 Earth
(Ground) cable
FR-B FR-B3
FR-B-750 to 2200 FR-B3-(N)400 to 2200 M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 FR-B-3700 FR-B3-(N)3700 M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 FR-B-5.5K FR-B3-(N)5.5K M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)7.5K M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 14 FR-B-11K FR-B3-(N)11K M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 14 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)15K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14
- FR-B3-(N)18.5K M8(M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)22K M8(M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 FR-B-30K FR-B3-(N)30K M8(M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 38 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)37K M10(M8) 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 FR-B-45K - M10(M8) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 60 FR-B-55K - M12(M8) 24.5 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 60 FR-B-75K - M12(M10) 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 *1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less. For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
*2 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, P1, and a screw for earthing (grounding). A screw for earthing (grounding) of the 18.5K or more is indicated in parentheses.
15
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
line voltage drop [V]=
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque reduction) in the low speed range.
Applicable Inverter Type Terminal Screw Size *2
Tightening Torque Nm
Crimping Terminal
Cable Sizes HIV, etc. (mm2) *1
FR-B FR-B3 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1 Earth
(Ground) Cable
FR-B-750 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700 M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 - FR-B3-(N)H5.5K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5
FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H7.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 - FR-B3-(N)H11K M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 8
FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H15K M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 8 - FR-B3-(N)H18.5K M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 14
FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)H22K M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 - FR-B3-(N)H30K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14
FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H37K M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 FR-B-55K - M8(M10) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 FR-B-75K - M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 38 FR-B-90K - M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 38 FR-B-110K - M10(M12) 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 *1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less. For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
*2 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, P1, and a screw for earthing (grounding). Screw size for P/+, N/-, P1 in 55K model are indicated in parentheses. A screw for P/+ for option connection of the 110K is indicated in parentheses.
CAUTION Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction. A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
3 wire resistance[m/m] wiring distance[m] current[A]
1000
16
Wiring
(2) Notes on earthing (grounding) Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be earthed (grounded). This
inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards) Use a neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard.
Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter. (Do not use the screw in the casing, chassis, etc.)
Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or greater than that indicated in page 14, 15, and minimize the cable length. The earthing (grounding) point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
(3) Total wiring length The overall wiring length for connection of a motor should be within the value in the table below. (An explosion-proof test is not performed for the multiple motor connection.)
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. Take the following measures in this case.
(1) Use a "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection according to wiring length. This setting is only available with FR-B series.
(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21) Terminal screw size: M4 Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
Tightening torque: 1.5Nm
FR-B3-(N)400 FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)750
FR-B-1500 or more FR-B3-(N)1500 or more
FR-B, B3 (at normal operation) 300m 500m 500m FR-B3-N (at low noise operation) 200m 300m 500m
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting (carrier frequency) (FR-B series only) FR-B-750 FR-B-1500 or more
2 (2kHz) or less 500m 500m 3 to 15 (3kHz to 14.5kHz) 300m 500m
Total wiring length (FR-B-1500 or more, FR-B3-(N)1500 or more)
CAUTION Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function or fast response current limit function or a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected on the inverter output side. If fast response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function. (For Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
500m or less
300m
300m
300m + 300m = 600m
Wiring Length 50m or less 50m to 100m exceeding 100m
Carrier frequency 14.5kHz or less 9kHz or less 4kHz or less
17
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
(5) When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply (separate power)
FR-B-750 to 3700 (200V/400V class), FR-B3-(N)(H) 400 to 3700
FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K (200V class), FR-B-7.5K(400V class), FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K
1)Loosen the upper screws. 2)Remove the lower screws. 3)Remove the jumper 4)Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control circuit to the lower terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
1)Remove the upper screws. 2)Remove the lower screws. 3)Remove the jumper. 4)Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
Inverter
MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
Remove the jumper
Main circuit terminal block
R1/L11 S1/L21
3)
1)
2)
4)
S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1
3)
4)
1)
2)
Main circuit
terminal block
S1/L21 R1/L11
S/ L2 T/
L3
R/ L1
R1/L11 S1/L21
18
Wiring
FR-B-11K(200V/400V class) or more, FR-B3-(N)(H)11K or more 1)Remove the upper screws. 2)Remove the lower screws. 3)Pull the jumper toward you to
remove. 4)Connect the separate power supply
cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
CAUTION Do not turn off the control power (terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21) with the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may
damage the inverter. Make up a circuit which will switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the control circuit power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 are switched off.
Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 removed when supplying power from other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper.
The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the primary side of the MC.
The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter capacity.
If the main circuit power is switched off (for 0.1s or more) then on again, the inverter resets and a fault output will not be held.
S1/L21 R1/L11
3)
4)
1)
2)
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
Power supply terminal block
for the control circuit R/L1S/L2 T/L3
R1/
L11
S1/
L21 Power supply
terminal block
for the control circuit
Main power supply
MC
VU W
FR-B-11K(200V) FR-B-15K(400V) FR-B3-(N)11K FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15K
FR-B-15K, 22K(200V) FR-B-22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)15K,18.5K, 22K FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
FR-B-30K (200V/400V class) or more, FR-B3-(N)(H) 30K or more
11K or less 15K 18.5K or more 200V class 60VA 80VA 80VA 400V class 60VA 60VA 80VA
19
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.4.5 Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
(1) Input signals
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
C on
ta ct
in pu
t
STF Forward rotation start
Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop.
When the STF and STR signals are turned on simultaneously, the stop command is given.
Input resistance 4.7k Voltage at opening: 21 to 27VDC Contacts at short-circuited: 4 to 6mADC
63 STR Reverse
rotation start Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop.
STOP Start self- holding selection
Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal. *2
RH, RM, RL
Multi-speed selection
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals. 64
JOG
Jog mode selection
Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation. *2
Pulse train input
JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. To use as pulse train input terminal, the Pr. 291 setting needs to be changed. (maximum input pulse: 100kpulses/s)
Input resistance 2k Contacts at short-circuited: 8 to 13mADC
*2
RT Second function selection
Turn on the RT signal to select second function.
Input resistance 4.7k Voltage at opening: 21 to 27VDC Contacts at short-circuited: 4 to 6mADC
*2
MRS Output stop Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output. Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.
*2
RES Reset
Used to reset fault output provided when fault occurs. Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off. Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr. 75, reset can be set to enabled only at a fault occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
104
AU
Terminal 4 input selection
Terminal 4 is valid only when the AU signal is turned on. (The frequency setting signal can be set between 4 and 20mADC.) Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
68
PTC input AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC switch to PTC.
*2
CS
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled. (Refer to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time in the chapter 4 of the instruction manual (applied).)
*2
SD
Contact input common (sink) (initial setting)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.
-------------------- External transistor common (source)
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such as a programmable controller, while source logic is selected, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
24VDC power supply common
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal). Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
PC
External transistor common (sink) (initial setting)
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such as a programmable controller, when sink logic is selected, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
Power supply voltage range 19.2 to 28.8VDC Permissible load current 100mA
23Contact input common (source)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
24VDC power supply Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
20
Wiring
*1 Set Pr.73, Pr.267 and the voltage/current input switch correctly and input the analog signals in accordance with the setting. When a voltage is input with the switch ON (current input specification) or a current is input with the switch OFF (voltage input specification), a failure may occur in the inverter or the analog circuit of the external device.
*2 Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
(2) Output signals
Fr eq
ue nc
y se
tti ng
10E Frequency setting power supply
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial status, connect it to terminal 10. Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it to terminal 10E. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection in Instruction Manual (applied).)
10VDC Permissible load
current 10mA *2
10 5VDC
Permissible load current 10mA
61, 66
2 Frequency setting (voltage)
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) provides the maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to switch from among input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mA. Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select current input (0 to 20mA) *1
Voltage input: Input resistance 10k 1k Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC Current input: Input resistance 245 5 Maximum permissible current 30mA
61, 66
4 Frequency setting (current)
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch from among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 10VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V). *1 Use Pr. 858 to switch terminal functions. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
62, 68
1 Frequency setting auxiliary
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10VDC adds this signal to terminal 2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr. 73 to switch between the input 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC (initial setting). Use Pr. 868 to switch terminal functions.
Input resistance 10k 1k Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC
*2
5 Frequency setting common
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground). -------------------- ------
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
R el
ay
A1, B1, C1
Relay output 1 (fault output)
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter protective function has activated and the output stopped. Abnormal: No conduction across B-C (Across A-C Continuity), Normal: Across B-C Continuity (No conduction across A-C)
Contact capacity: 230VAC 0.3A (Power factor=0.4) 30VDC 0.3A
*2
A2, B2, C2
Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output *2
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
Voltage/current input switch
24
switch1
switch2
21
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
*2 Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
(3) Communication
O pe
n co
lle ct
or
RUN Inverter running
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched high during stop or DC injection brake operation.*1 Permissible load
24VDC (27VDC maximum) 0.1A (A voltage drop is 2.8V maximum when the signal is on.)
*1 Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts). High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*2
SU Up to frequency
Switched low when the output frequency reaches within the range of 10% (initial value) of the set frequency. Switched high during acceleration/deceleration and at a stop. *1
Fault code (4bit) output
*2
OL Overload alarm
Switched low when stall prevention is activated by the stall prevention function. Switched high when stall prevention is cancelled. *1
*2
IPF Instantaneous power failure
Switched low when an instantaneous power failure and under voltage protections are activated. *1
*2
FU Frequency detection
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the preset detected frequency and high when less than the preset detected frequency. *1
*2
SE Open collector output common Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU -------------------- -----
P ul
se FM
For meter
Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor items. Not output during inverter reset. The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the corresponding monitoring item.
Output item: Output frequency (initial setting)
Permissible load current 2mA 1440pulses/s at 60Hz
*2
NPN open collector output
Signals can be output from the open collector terminals by setting Pr. 291.
Maximum output pulse: 50kpulses/s Permissible load current : 80mA
*2
A na
lo g
AM Analog signal output
Output item: Output frequency (initial setting)
Output signal 0 to 10VDC Permissible load current 1mA (load impedance 10k or more) Resolution 8 bit
*2
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Refer to page
R S
-4 85
-------------------- PU connector
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (for connection on a 1:1 basis only) . Conforming standard : EIA-485(RS-485) . Transmission format : Multidrop link . Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps . Overall length : 500m
25
R S
-4 85
te rm
in al
s TXD+ Inverter transmission terminal
With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485. . Conforming standard : EIA-485(RS-485) . Transmission format : Multidrop link . Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps . Overall length : 500m
25
TXD-
RXD+ Inverter reception terminalRXD-
SG Earth (Ground)
U S
B -------------------- USB connector
The FR Configurator can be performed by connecting the inverter to the personal computer through USB. . Interface:Conforms to USB1.1 . Transmission speed:12Mbps . Connector:USB B connector (B receptacle)
26
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
22
Wiring
2.4.6 Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory. To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position. (The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.) 1)Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.) Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2)Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to source logic (SOURCE).
3)Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION 1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly. 2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
Jumper connector
23
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
4)Sink logic and source logic In sink logic, a signal switches on when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. In source logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
When using an external power supply for transistor output
Sink logic type Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction due to undesirable current.)
Source logic type Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of the inverter with terminal +24V of the external power supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install an external power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
Current
PC
STF R
STR R
Source logic
Source
connector
Current
SD
STF R
STR R
Sink
connector
Sink logic
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when source logic is selected
DC input (source type)
24VDC
RUN
SE
TB1
TB18
R
Inverter
R
Current flow
+ -+-
DC input (sink type)
Inverter
24VDC
RUN
SE
TB1
TB17
R
R
Current flow
QY40P type transistor
output unit
TB1
TB2
TB17
TB18
24VDC SD
PC
STR
STF
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
Current flow
Constant voltage circuit
QY80 type transistor
output unit
Constant
voltage
circuit
PC
TB1
TB2
TB17Fuse
TB18
STF
STR
SD
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
2 4
V D
C
Current flow
24
Wiring
2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit
(1) Control circuit terminal layout
(2) Wiring instructions 1) Terminals 5, SD and SE are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. Do not earth (ground). Avoid
connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5. 2) Use shielded or twisted wires for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and
power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit). 3) Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to
prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
4) Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit. 5) Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc. 6) It is recommended to use the wires of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the wire gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many wires running or the wires are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
7) The maximum wiring length should be 30m (200m for terminal FM).
Terminal screw size: M3.5 Tightening torque: 1.2Nm
Wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more For wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more, separate away from wiring of the main circuit. Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
1AMSDRESMRSSTOPAURTRHRMRL
PCCSJOGSTRSTFSDSDFUOLIPFSURUNSE
FM
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
Make cuts along the lines inside with
a cutter knife and such.
25
Wiring
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.4.8 Connecting the operation panel using a connection cable Having an operation panel on the enclosure surface is convenient. With a connection cable, you can mount the operation panel (FR-DU07) to the enclosure surface, and connect it to the inverter.
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block
CAUTION Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN port, FAX modem socket or telephone connector. The inverter and machine could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
REMARKS Refer to page 5 for removal method of the operation panel.
When using a commercially available connector and cable as a parameter unit connection cable, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
The inverter can be connected to the computer and FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485) Transmission format: Multidrop link Communication speed: MAX 38400bps Overall length: 500m Connection cable:Twisted pair cable
(4 pairs)
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2)(option)
Operation panel(FR-DU07)
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP)(option)
RXDRDA1 (RXD1+)
RDB1 (RXD1-)
RDA2 (RXD2+)
RDB2 (RXD2-)
SDA1 (TXD1+)
SDB1 (TXD1-)
SDA2 (TXD2+)
SDB2 (TXD2-)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND) VCC
TXD
OPEN
100
Terminating resistor switch
Factory-set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
26
Wiring
2.4.10 Communication operation
2.4.11 USB connector
A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB (Ver1. 1) cable. You can perform parameter setting and monitoring with the FR Configurator.
USB communication specifications
Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters. For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation), communication can be performed with the PU connector and RS-485 terminal. For the Modbus RTU protocol, communication can be performed with the RS-485 terminal. For further details, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
Interface Conforms to USB1.1 Transmission speed 12Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5m Connector USB B connector (B receptacle)
Power supply Self-power supply
Programmable controller
Multidrop link
(32 inverters maximum
are connectable)
Inverter Inverter Inverter
USB cable USB connector
Place a flat-blade screwdriver,
etc. in a slot and push up the
cover to open.
Removal of cover
27
Connection of stand-alone option units
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required. Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
2.5.1 Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR) (22K or less)
The built-in brake resistor is connected across terminals P/+ and PR. Fit the external dedicated brake resistor (FR- ABR) when the built-in brake resistor does not have enough thermal capability for high-duty operation. At this time, remove the jumper from across terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) and connect the dedicated brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR. (For the locations of terminal P/+ and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page 10).) Removing jumpers across terminal PR-PX disables the built-in brake resistor (power is not supplied). Note that the built-in brake resistor is not need to be removed from the inverter. The lead wire of the built-in brake resistor is not need to be removed from the terminal. Set parameters below. Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1" Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty = "7.5K or less: 10%, 11K or more: 6%"
FR-B750 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)400, 750 1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.)
FR-B-1500 to 3700 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR-B-750 to 3700 (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700
1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.)
CAUTION 1. The brake resistor connected should be the only dedicated brake resistor. 2. The jumper across terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) must be disconnected before connecting the dedicated brake resistor.
Doing so may damage the inverter.
1) Removal of Jumper 2) Connection of Brake Resistor
1) Removal of Jumper 2) Connection of Brake Resistor
Jumper
Terminal PX
Terminal PR
Terminal PR
Terminal P/+
Brake resistor
Jumper
Terminal PX
Terminal PR
Terminal PR Terminal P/+
Brake resistor
28
Connection of stand-alone option units
FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)5.5K, 7.5K FR-B-7.5K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H5.5K, 7.5K
1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.)
FR-B-11K to 22K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)11K to 22K FR-B-15K, 22K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H11K to 22K Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR.
* Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
1) Removal of Jumper 2) Connection of Brake Resistor
FR-B-11K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)11K FR-B-15K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15K
FR-B-15K to 22K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)15K to 22K FR-B-22K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
Terminal PR
Terminal PX
Terminal PR
Terminal P/+
Terminal PX Brake resistor
Jumper *
Terminal P/+
Terminal PR
Brake resistor
Terminal P/+
Terminal PR
Brake resistor
Jumper *
29
Connection of stand-alone option units
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, the following sequence is recommended to prevent overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
*1 Since the inverter of 11K or more is not provided with the PX terminal, a jumper does not need to be removed. *2 Refer to the table below for the type number of each capacity of thermal relay and the diagram below for the connection. (Always install a thermal
relay when using the 11K or more)
Power Supply Voltage
High-Duty Brake Resistor
Thermal Relay Type (Mitsubishi product) Contact Rating
200V
FR-ABR-0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.7A
110VAC 5A 220VAC 2A (AC-11 class) 110VDC 0.5A, 220VDC 0.25A (DC-11 class)
FR-ABR-0.75K TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A FR-ABR-2.2K TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A FR-ABR-3.7K TH-N20CXHZ-3.6A FR-ABR-5.5K TH-N20CXHZ-5A FR-ABR-7.5K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A FR-ABR-11K TH-N20CXHZ-11A FR-ABR-15K TH-N20CXHZ-11A FR-ABR-22K TH-N60-22A
400V
FR-ABR-H0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.24A FR-ABR-H0.75K TH-N20CXHZ-0.35A FR-ABR-H1.5K TH-N20CXHZ-0.9A FR-ABR-H2.2K TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A FR-ABR-H3.7K TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A FR-ABR-H5.5K TH-N20CXHZ-2.5A FR-ABR-H7.5K TH-N20CXHZ-3.6A FR-ABR-H11K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A FR-ABR-H15K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A FR-ABR-H22K TH-N20-9A
R
MC
Power
Supply
High-duty brake resistor
(FR-ABR)
Thermal relay
(OCR)(*2)Inverter
PX
PR
P/+
S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
Disconnect jumper. (*1)
MC
Power
Supply
T
F
ON OFF MC
MC
OCR Contact
PX
PR
P/+
S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
Inverter (OCR)(*2)
Thermal relay
(FR-ABR)
High-duty brake resistor
R
Disconnect jumper. (*1)
B
C
T
F
ON OFF
OCR ContactMC
MC
To the inverter P/+ terminal
To the ABR
TH-N20
1/L1 5/L3
2/T1 6/T3
30
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2) as shown below to improve the braking capability at deceleration. (1) Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resitor
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *3 Be sure to remove a jumper across terminal PR-PX when using the FR-BU2 with the inverter of 7.5K or less. *4 Keep a wiring distance of within 5m between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor. Even when the wiring
is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m. *5 It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of discharging resistors. *6 Refer to FR-BU2 manual for connection method of discharging resistor.
Brake Unit Discharging Resistor Recommended External Thermal Relay FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50 (one) TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A FR-BU2-3.7K GRZG 200-10 (three in series) TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A FR-BU2-7.5K GRZG 300-5 (four in series) TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A FR-BU2-15K GRZG 400-2 (six in series) TH-N20CXHZ 11A FR-BU2-H7.5K GRZG 200-10 (six in series) TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5 (eight in series) TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A FR-BU2-H30K GRZG 400-2 (twelve in series) TH-N20CXHZ 11A
CAUTION Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
U
V
W
P/+
N/-
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Explosion-proof motor
IM
Inverter PR
N/-
BUE
SD
P/+
A
B
C
FR-BU2
GRZG type discharging resistor *6
RR
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
OFFON
MC T
PR
PX
5m or less *4
*4
*3
*2
MC
*1 *1
*5
31
Connection of stand-alone option units
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
(2) Connection example with FR-BR-(H) type resistor unit
(3) Connection example with MT-BR5 type resistor unit
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *3 Be sure to remove a jumper across terminal PR-PX when using the FR-BU with the inverter of 7.5K or less. *4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. Even when the
wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m *5 Normal: across TH1-TH2 is closed, Alarm: across TH1-TH2 is open
CAUTION Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (MT-BR5) should be within 5m. If twisted wires
are used, the distance should be within 10m. *4 Normal: across TH1-TH2 is open, Alarm: across TH1-TH2 is closed *5 CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.
CAUTION Set "2" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use MT-BR5 type resistor unit.
U
V
W
P/+
N/-
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
IM
Inverter PR
N/-
BUE
SD
P/+
P
A
B
C
FR-BU2
FR-BR
TH2
TH1
PR Three phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
OFFON
MC T
PR
PX
*5
5m or less *4
*4
*3
*2
MC
*1 *1
Explosion-proof motor
MC R/L1
IM
Inverter
S/L2 T/L3
U V
P/+ N/-
P PR
5m or less
W
Three phase AC power supply
MCCB
TH1
TH2
MC
CR1
OFFON
MC
CR1
T
*3
*1 *3
*1
*5
*4P N
BUE SD
P PR
Brake unit FR-BU2
Resistor unit MT-BR5
*2
Explosion-proof motor
32
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.3 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)
When connecting the brake unit (FR-BU(H)/MT-BU5) to improve the brake capability at deceleration, make connection as shown below. (1) Connection with the FR-BU
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU (H)) terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
*2 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *3 Be sure to remove a jumper across terminals PR and PX when using the FR-BU with the inverter of 7.5K or less. *4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. If twisted wires are
used, the distance should be within 10m.
CAUTION If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter's input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
U
V
W
P/+
N/
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
IM
Inverter
PR
N/
P/+
P
HA
HB
HC
FR-BU
FR-BR
TH2
TH1
PR
*1
Three-phase AC
power supply
MCCB MC
OFFON
MC
T *2
Explosion- proof motor
MC
PR
PX
*4
5m or less
*3
33
Connection of stand-alone option units
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
(2) Connection with the MT-BU5 (FR-B-75K or more) After making sure that the MT-BU5 is properly connected, set the following parameters. Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1" Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty = "10%"
2) Insert a connector on the MT-BU5 side through a rubber bush to connect to a connector on the inverter side.
*1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *2 The wiring length between the resistor unit and brake resistor should be 10m maximum when wires are twisted and 5m
maximum when wires are not twisted.
CAUTION Install the brake unit in a place where a cooling air reaches the brake unit heatsink and within a distance of the cable supplied
with the brake unit reaches the inverter. For wiring of the brake unit and inverter, use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit. Connect the main circuit cable to
the inverter terminals P/+ and N/- and connect the control circuit cable to the CN8 connector inside by making cuts in the rubber bush at the top of the inverter for leading the cable.
The brake unit which uses multiple resistor units has terminals equal to the number of resistor units. Connect one resistor unit to one pair of terminal (P, PR).
CAUTION Clamp the CN8 connector cable on the inverter side with a wire clamp securely. Do not connect the MT-BU5 to a CN8 connector of the FR-B-55K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H55K.
MC
R/L1
IM
Inverter
Brake unit
MT-BU5
Resistor unit
MT-BR5
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
P/+
N/ P
PR
P
PR
P
PR
P TH1
TH2
PR
CN8
W
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MCCB
TH1
TH2
MC
OFFON
MC
CR1 CR2
CR1
CR2
T *1
Explosion- proof motor
5m or
less
*2
Rubber bushes
Make cuts in
rubber bush
Insert the connector until
you hear a click sound.
CN8 connector Wire clamp
34
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.4 Connection of the high power factor converter (MT-HC)(FR-B-75K or more)
When connecting the high power factor converter (MT-HC) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter. After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection.
*1 Remove the jumper across terminals R/L1 - R1/L11, S/L2 - S1/L21 of the inverter, and connect the control circuit power supply to the R1/L11 and S1/L21 terminals. The power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 must be open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option alarm) will occur. (Refer to page 114.)
*2 Do not insert the MCCB between terminals P/+ N/- (P P/+, N N/-). Opposite polarity of terminals N, P will damage the inverter.
*3 Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal. (Refer to page 89.) For communication where the start command is sent only once, e.g. RS-485 communication operation, use the X11 signal when making setting to hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. (Refer to page 95.)
*4 Connect the power supply to terminals R1 and S1 of the MT-HC via an insulated transformer. *5 Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the MT-HC to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and
connect terminal SE of the MT-HC to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connection, MT-HC will be damaged.
CAUTION The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched. Use sink logic (factory setting) when the MT-HC is connected. The MT-HC cannot be connected when source logic is selected. When connecting the inverter to the MT-HC, do not connect the DC reactor provided to the inverter.
MT-HCL01 MT-HCB
R1 S1
R1 S1 R1/ L11
S1/ L21
MT-HCL02 MT-HC Inverter
MT-HCTR Insulated transformer
R
S
T
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
R2
S2
T2
R2
S2
T2
R3
S3
T3
R3
S3
T3
R4
S4
T4
R4
S4
T4
R
S
T
88R
88S
88R
88S *2
RDY
RSO
SE
X10
RES
SD
*3
*1
*5
*1
*4
IM
P
N
P/+
N/
Explosion- proof motor
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MCCB MC
35
Connection of stand-alone option units
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.5.5 Connection of power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (FR-B-75K or more) When connecting a power regeneration converter (MT-RC), perform wiring securely as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the regeneration converter and inverter. After connecting securely, set "1" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty.
2.5.6 Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL) When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it between terminals P1-P/+. For the 55K or less, the jumper connected across terminals P1-P/+ must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not exhibit its performance. For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
CAUTION When using the FR-B series together with the MT-RC, install a
magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after 1s or more has elapsed after powering on the MT-RC. When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MT-RC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged or the MCCB may trip or be damaged.
Refer to the MT-RC manual for precautions for connecting the power coordination reactor and others.
CAUTION 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m. 2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page 14)
DCL
P1 P1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
R
S
T
R
S
T
R1
S1
R2
S2
T2
R2
S2
T2
RES
STF
SD
C
B
A
U
V
W
Inverter
MT-RCL
P
P/+ N/
P N
RDY
SE
MT-RC
Reset signal
Alarm signal
Ready signal
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MCCB MC2
I M
Explosion- proof motor
MC1
MT-RC power supply (MC1)
Inverter input power supply (MC2) ON
ON
1s or more
P1
FR-HEL
Remove
the jumper.
P/+
36
Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)
2.6 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) (1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC) On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes. ( Refer to page 3 for selection.) 1)To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g.
emergency stop operation). For example, MC avoids overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is insufficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
2)To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure 3)To reset the inverter for an extended period of time
While the power is ON, inverter is consuming a little power even during inverter stop. When stopping the inverter for an extended period of time, powering off the inverter will save power slightly.
4)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3MC for the inverter input side current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.
(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate.
REMARKS Since repeated inrush currents at power on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1 million times. (For the 200V class 37K or more, switching life is about 500,000)), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn on/off the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
Inverter start/stop circuit example As shown on the left, always use the start signal (ON or OFF of STF(STR) signal) to make a start or stop. *1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down
transformer. *2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 of the
control circuit to the primary side of the MC to hold an alarm signal when the inverter's protective circuit is activated. At this time, remove jumpers across terminals R/ L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21. (Refer to page 17 for removal of the jumper.)
Power
supply
MCCB
RA
U
V
A1
B1
C1
W
To the
motor
Inverter
MC
STF(STR)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
OFF ON
MC
Stop
Start
RA
MC
Operation preparation
Start/Stop RA
MC
T *1
*2
SD
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
37
Precautions for use of the inverter
2.7 Precautions for use of the inverter The FR-B, B3 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method may shorten the product life or damage the product. Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. Refer to page 14 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5) The overall wiring length should be 500m maximum. Especially for long distance wiring, the fast response current limit function may decrease or the equipment connected to the secondary side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 16.)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is installed, immediately remove it.
(8) For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/- of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester, etc.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules. Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation resistance may damage the inverter modules.
Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and inter-phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on. Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter. Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter.
(11) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits. Application of permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuit and incorrect polarity may damage the I/O terminal. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short terminals 10E-5.
(Refer to page 9)
(Refer to page 8)
38
Precautions for use of the inverter
(12) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal. If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.
(13) Instructions for overload operation When performing an operation of frequent start/stop with the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose a large capacity inverter and motor which have enough allowance for current.
(14) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
(15) If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes frequency setting signal to fluctuate and motor rotation speed to be unstable when changing motor speed with analog signal, the following countermeasures are effective. . Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. . Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables). . Use shield cables as signal cables. . Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).
39
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
2
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N A
N D
W IR
IN G
2.8 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products, provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the inverter fails for some reason. At the same time, consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter, without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be detected.
(2) Backup method outside the inverter Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure status of the inverter iteself. For example, when the inverter CPU fails, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter fault signal, start signal and RUN signal, there is a case where a fault signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output even if an inverter fault occurs. Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the backup system such as cheking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
1) Start signal and actual operation check Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the start signal turns off. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
2) Command speed and actual operation check Check that there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command and detected speed of the speed detector.
No Interlock Method Check Method Used Signals Refer to Page
1) Inverter protective function operation
Operation check of an alarm contact Circuit error detection by negative logic
Fault output signal (ALM signal)
Refer to the chapter 4 of the instruction manual (applied)
2) Inverter running status Operation ready signal check Operation ready signal (RY signal)
Refer to the chapter 4 of the instruction manual (applied)
3) Inverter running status Logic check of the start signal and running signal
Start signal (STF signal, STR signal) Running signal (RUN signal)
Refer to the chapter 4 of the instruction manual (applied)
4) Inverter running status Logic check of the start signal and output current
Start signal (STF signal, STR signal) Output current detection signal (Y12 signal)
Refer to the chapter 4 of the instruction manual (applied)
Inverter
Controller
System failure
To the alarm detection sensor
Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
40
Step of operation
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR
3.1 Step of operation The inverter needs frequency command and start command. Turning the start command on start the motor rotating and the motor speed is determined by the frequency command (set frequency). Refer to the flow chart below to perform setting.
When protecting the motor from overheat by the inverter, set Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay (Refer to page 50)
CAUTION Check the following items before powering on the inverter. Check that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 7) Check that wiring is correct. (Refer to page 8) Check that no load is connected to the motor.
Connect a switch, relay, etc.
to the control circuit
terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
Start command using the PU connector and
RS-485 terminal of the inverter and plug-in
option (Communication)
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/
FR-PU07).
(PU)
Change frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
Perform frequency setting by a current output device (Connection across
terminals 4-5)
Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device (Connection across
terminals 2-5)
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/
FR-PU07).
Change of frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
Perform frequency setting by a current output device (Connection across terminals 4-5)
Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device (Connection across terminals 2-5)
(External) (External) (External)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
Start command with
on the operation panel (PU)
Step of operationt f r ti
Installation/mounting
Wiring of the power
supply and motor
How to give a start
command?
How to give a frequency
command?
How to give a frequency
command?
{Refer to page 58} {Refer to page 60} {Refer to page 62} {Refer to page 61}
{Refer to page 10}
{Refer to page 7}
Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
{Refer to page 63} {Refer to page 64} {Refer to page 68} {Refer to page 66}
41
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
Setting dial (Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter
dial)
Used to change the
frequency setting and
parameter values.
Operation mode switchover Used to switch between the PU and External operation mode.
When using the External operation mode (operation using a separately
connected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key to
light up the EXT indication. (Change the Pr.79 value to use the combined mode.)
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Monitor(4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter
number, etc.
No function
Monitor indication Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate External operation mode.
NET: Lit to indicate Network operation mode.
Rotation direction indication
REV: Lit during reverse rotation FWD: Lit during forward rotation
Start command forward rotation
Start command reverse rotation
Stop operation Used to stop Run command.
Fault can be reset when
protective function is activated
(fault).
Mode
switchover Used to change
each setting mode.
Unit indication Hz: Lit to indicate frequency.
A: Lit to indicate current.
V: Lit to indicate voltage.
(Flicker when the set frequency monitor is
displayed.)
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
energy saving monitor of Pr. 52 is set.
Used to set each setting.
If pressed during operation, monitor
changes as below;
Running frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Operation mode indication
On: Forward/reverse operation
Flickering: When the frequency command is
not given even if the
forward/reverse command is given.
When the MRS signal is input.
*
42
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.2 Basic operation (factory setting)
At powering on (External operation mode)
PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)
Parameter setting mode
PU Jog operation mode
Output current monitor Output voltage monitor
Display the present
setting
Value change
Value change
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter and a setting value
flicker alternately.
Parameter clear Parameter
all clear
Faults history clear
Parameter copy
(Example)
(Example)
Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
and frequency flicker.
[Operation for displaying faults history]
Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists, is displayed.
Operation mode switchover
P a
ra m
e te
r s e
tt in
g F
a u
lt s h
is to
ry M
o n
it o
r/ fr
e q
u e
n c y s
e tt
in g
(Refer to page 120)
(Refer to page 45)
43
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.2.3 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s))
Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
When the setting dial and key operation are invalid, appears on the operation panel.
If dial and key operation is attempted while dial and key operation are invalid, appears. (When dial or key is not touched for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press for 2s.
Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be made invalid to prevent parameter change and unexpected start or frequency setting.
POINT
Set "10 or 11" (key lock valid) in Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Functions valid even in the operation lock status
Stop and reset with .
CAUTION Cancel the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU
operation mode.
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
4.Turn until appears.
The parameter
number read
previously
appears.
8.Press for 2s to show the key lock.
Press for 2s.
(Pr. 161)
" " (initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the setting
value " ".
44
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage
3.2.5 First priority monitor
Hold down for 1s to set monitor description to be appeared first in the monitor mode.
(To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
3.2.6 Setting dial push
Push the setting dial ( ) to display the set frequency currently set.
POINT
Monitor display of output frequency, output current and output voltage can be changed by pushing during
monitoring mode.
2.Independently of whether the inverter is running
in any operation mode or at a stop, the output
current monitor appears by pressing .
3.Press to show the output voltage monitor.
1.Press during operation to choose the output
frequency monitor
DisplayOperation
45
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.2.7 Changing the parameter setting value
Changing example Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.
are displayed ... Why?
appears. ......Write disable error appears. ......Write error during operation appears. ......Calibration error appears. ......Mode designation error
For details refer to page 106.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4. Pr. 1) appears.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set
value " ".
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
By turning , you can read another parameter.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
Press twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.
to
46
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.8 Parameter clear, all parameter clear
POINT
Set "1" in Pr. CL Parameter clear, ALLC All parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.)
Refer to the parameter list on page 70 and later for parameters to be cleared with this operation.
and are displayed alternately ... Why? The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press .
is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)). 2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Press to show the setting again.
4.Turn until " ", " "
appears.
6.Turn clockwise to change it to
the setting value of " ".
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
All parameter clearParameter clear
47
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.2.9 Parameter copy and parameter verification
(1) Parameter copy
PCPY Setting Description 0 Cancel 1 Copy the source parameters to the operation panel. 2 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter. 3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 48 .)
REMARKS When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-B,B3 series (A700 specifications) or parameter copy write is performed after
parameter copy read is stopped, "model error ( )" is displayed. Refer to the parameter list on page 70 and later for availability of parameter copy. When the power is turned off or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or
check the values by parameter verification.
Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters.
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
Connect it during a stop.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker Parameter copy complete!!
6.Press to copy the source parameters
to the operation panel.
4.Press to to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
Flicker Parameter copy complete!!
9.Press to write the parameters copied to
the operation panel to the destination inverter.
3.Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
5.Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
Flickers for about 30s
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
About 30s later
10.When copy is completed,
" " and " " flicker.
11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power off once, before starting operation.
7.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
8.After performing steps 2 to 5,
turn to change it to " ".
The parameter
number previously
read appears.
48
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
(2) Parameter verification
appears...Why? Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.
appears...Why? Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
and flicker alternately Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 55K or less and 75K or more. 1. Set "0" in Pr. 160 User group read selection. 2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 158, Pr. 557, Pr. 893.
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.
REMARKS When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications), "model error ( )" is displayed.
flickers ... Why? Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.
55K or less 75K or more Pr. 989 Setting 10 100
Hold down to verify.
2.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
7.Press to read the parameter setting
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.
1.Move the operation panel to the
inverter to be verified.
Move it during a stop.
Flicker Parameter verification complete!!
4.Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set value
" "(parameter copy verification mode).
8.It there is no difference, and
flicker to complete verification.
Flickers for about 30s
Flickering
If different parameters exist, different
parameter numbers and flicker.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
5.Press to read the currently set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
49
Before operation
3.3 Before operation
3.3.1 Simple mode parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
POINT
Only simple mode parameter can be displayed using Pr.160 User group read selection. (All parameters are displayed with the initial setting.) Set Pr. 160 User group read selection as required. (Refer to page 45 for parameter change.)
Pr. 160 Description 9999 Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
0 (Initial Value) Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
Parameter Number Name Incre
ments Initial Value Range
Applications Refer toFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
1 Maximum frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 120Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz
Set when the maximum output frequency need to be limited. * The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more) 51
2 Minimum frequency 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz
Set when the minimum output frequency need to be limited. * The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz Set when changing the preset speed in
the parameter with a terminal. * The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
645 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0.01Hz 10Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz
7 Acceleration time 0.1s 5/15s* 0 to 3600s Acceleration/deceleration time can be set. * The initial value differs according to the
inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or more) 52
8 Deceleration time 0.1s 5/15s* 0 to 3600s
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
0.01/ 0.1A*
Rated inverter current
0 to 500/ 0 to 3600A*
Protect the motor from overheat by the inverter. Set the rated motor current. * The increments and setting range differ
according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
50
79 Operation mode selection 1 0 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 Select the operation command location and
frequency command location. 53
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Frequency for the maximum value of the potentiometer (5V initial value) can be changed. * The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
67
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Frequency for the maximum current input (20mA initial value) can be changed. * The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
69
160 User group read selection 1 0 0, 1, 9999
Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted.
50
Before operation
3.3.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated inverter current *1
55K or less 0 to 500A Set the rated motor current.
75K or more 0 to 3600A *1 Refer to page 132 for the rated inverter current value.
The initial values of the FR-B-750(200/400V), FR-B3-(N)(H) 400, 750 are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.The minimum setting increments are 0.01A for the 55K or less and 0.1A for the 75K or more.
Changing example Change the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting to 7.5A according to the motor rated current. (FR-B-1500, FR-B3-(N)1500)
CAUTION Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off. Electronic thermal relay may not function when 5% or less of inverter rated current is set to electronic thermal relay setting.
5.Press to show the present
set value. (8A for FR-B-1500,
FR-B3-(N)1500)
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
By turning , you can read another parameter.
4.Turn until " "(Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay) appears.
6.Turn to change the set value
to
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press to choose the PU
operation mode.
PU indication is lit.
The parameter number
read previously appears.
DisplayOperation
" ". (7.5A)
Refer to page 132 , 134 for initial value of the inverter rated current.
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
51
Before operation
3.3.3 Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity(22K or less/30K or more)
Motor speed can be limited.
Parameter Number Name
Initial Value Setting Range Description FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
1 Maximum frequency 60Hz 120Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *
0 to 120Hz
Set the upper limit of the output frequency. Set the Pr.1 Maximum frequency according to the permissible frequency of a pressure- resistant, explosion-proof type motor.
2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *
0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Changing example Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer, etc. to 60Hz maximum. (Set "60"Hz in Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.)
REMARKS The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even if the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will
not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.) Note that Pr. 15 Jog frequency has higher priority than the minimum frequency.
When the Pr. 1 setting is changed, frequency higher than the Pr. 1 setting can not be set by .
CAUTION Note that when Pr. 2 is set higher than Pr. 13 Starting frequency, simply turning on the start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency according to the set acceleration time even if the command frequency is not input.
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.2 Frequency setting
Clamped at the
maximum frequency
Clamped at the minimum frequency
5, 10V (20mA)
0 (4mA)
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn until (Pr. 1) appears.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set
value " ".
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
By turning , you can read another parameter.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
52
Before operation
3.3.4 Change acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
* Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and setting increments is "0.1s".
Set in Pr. 7 Acceleration time a larger value for a slower speed increase and a smaller value for a faster speed increase. Set in Pr. 8 Deceleration time a larger value for a slower speed decrease and a smaller value for a faster speed decrease.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting
Range Description
7 Acceleration time 7.5K or less 5s 0 to 3600/
360s * Set the motor acceleration time. 11K or more 15s
8 Deceleration time 7.5K or less 5s 0 to 3600/
360s * Set the motor deceleration time. 11K or more 15
Changing example Change the Pr. 7 Acceleration time setting from "5s" to "10s".
Running
frequency
Acceleration
time
Deceleration
time
Time
Pr.20
Pr.7 Pr.8
O u
tp u
t
fr e
q u
e n
cy (
H z )
Pr.110 Pr.111
Pr.44 Pr.45
(60Hz)
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn until (Pr. 7) appears.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
By turning , you can read another parameter.
The initial value
differs according
to the capacity.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set
value " ".
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
53
Before operation
3.3.5 Selection of the start command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79)
*1 The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
*2 For the terminal used for the X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign functions. For Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied). When the X12 signal is not assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to PU operation interlock signal.
Select the start command location and frequency command location.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
LED Indication : Off : On
79 Operation mode selection
0
0
Use external/PU switchover mode (press to switch
between the PU and External operation mode. (Refer to page 58)) At power on, the inverter is in the External operation mode.
External operation mode
PU operation mode
1 Fixed to PU operation mode
2 Fixed to External operation mode Operation can be performed by switching between the external and NET operation mode.
External operation mode
NET operation mode
3
External/PU combined operation mode 1 Running command Start command
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/ FR-PU07) setting or external signal input (multi- speed setting, across terminals 4-5 (valid when AU signal turns on)).*1
External signal input (terminal STF, STR)
4
External/PU combined operation mode 2 Running command Start command
External signal input (Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG, multi-speed selection, etc.)
Input from the PU (FR- DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
( , )
6 Switchover mode Switch among PU operation, external operation, and NET operation while keeping the same operating status.
PU operation mode
External operation mode
NET operation mode
7
External operation mode (PU operation interlock) X12 signal ON *2
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode. (output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF *2 Operation mode can not be switched to the PU operation mode.
PU operation mode
External operation mode
54
Before operation
3.3.6 Before operating the FR-B3 series (offline auto tuning) (Pr. 80, Pr.81, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96)
Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series. The FR-B3 series has passed an explosion-proof test performed under Advanced magnetic flux vector control with offline auto tuning in motor rotation mode. Advanced magnetic flux vector control is set in the initial setting. Be sure to perform offline auto tuning in motor rotation mode before operating the inverter. What is Advanced magnetic flux vector control?
The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation to flow a motor current which meets the load torque. Output frequency compensation (slip compensation) is made so that the motor actual speed approximates a speed command value. Effective when load fluctuates drastically, etc.
What is offline auto tuning? When performing FR-B3 series, the motor can be run with the optimum operating characteristics by automatically measuring the motor constants (offline auto tuning) even when each motor constants differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring length is long.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
80 Motor capacity Inverter capacity Inverter capacity Setting cannot be changed.
81 Number of motor poles 4 4 The number of motor poles is always four.
83 Rated motor voltage 200/400V* 0 to 1000V Set the rated motor voltage(V). * The initial value differs according to the
voltage level. (200V/400V) 84 Rated motor frequency 60Hz 10 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
96 Auto tuning setting/ status 0
0 Offline auto tuning is not performed
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running
101 Offline auto tuning is performed with motor running
POINT Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. (As the load is lighter, tuning accuracy is higher.
Tuning accuracy does not change even if the inertia is large.) For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode (Pr.96 = "1") or rotation mode (Pr.96 =
"101"). Perform tuning in motor rotation mode in this case. Reading/writing/copy of motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
B3
55
Before operation
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
(1) Before performing offline auto tuning Check the following before performing offline auto tuning. A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start. When performing the offline auto tuning, always select the rotation mode (Pr.96="101"). Note the following when selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status =
"101"). Torque is not enough during tuning. The motor may be run at nearly its rated speed. The brake is open. No external force is applied to rotate the motor.
(2) Setting 1) Set "101" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status .
When the setting is "101" . . . . . . Tuning is performed without motor running.
It takes approximately 40s until tuning is completed. The motor runs at nearly its rated frequency.
2) Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 50) 3) Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 200V/400V) in Pr. 83 Rated motor voltage and rated frequency of motor
(initial value is 60Hz) in Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency . (For a Japanese standard motor, etc. which has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated values, use it with initial value (200V/ 60Hz or 400V/60Hz).)
56
Before operation
(3) Execution of tuning
1)When performing PU operation, press / of the operation panel.
For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
2)Monitor is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
Reference: Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)
CAUTION Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-
PU07) if the inverter is ready for tuning. (Refer to 2 below)
CAUTION When selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"), caution must be
taken since the motor runs.
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press of the operation panel.
(Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.) During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid:
Input signals
Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequence which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the inverter.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto tuning. Auto tuning is not executed properly.
Parameter Unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) Display Operation Panel (FR-DU07) Display
Pr. 96 setting 101 101
(1) Setting
(2) Tuning in progress
(3) Normal end
(4) Error end (when the inverter protective function is activated)
Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time
Rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "101")
Approximately 40s (Offline auto tuning time varies with the acceleration and deceleration time settings as indicated below. Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time + deceleration time + approx. 30s)
STOP PU 101
FWD PU 102
STF
TUNE
STOP PU
103 STF
TUNE COMPLETION
Flickering
STOP PU
9
STF
TUNE ERROR
57
Before operation
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3)When offline auto tuning ends, press of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn
off the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
4)If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
5)When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline
auto tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
REMARKS Do not change the Pr. 96 setting after completion of tuning (103).
If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning data is made invalid. If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning must be performed again.
Error Display Error Cause Remedy 8 Forced end Set "101" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again. 9 Inverter protective function operation Make setting again.
91 Current limit (stall prevention) function was activated.
Increase acceleration/deceleration time. Set "1" in Pr. 156 .
92 Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated value. Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.
93 Calculation error A motor is not connected.
Check the motor wiring and make setting again.
CAUTION The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the
offline auto tuning is performed again. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on, the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
Any alarm occurs during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if a fault retry has been set, retry is ignored. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
CAUTION Note that the motor may start running suddenly. When the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to insufficient torque.
58
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
3.4.1 Set the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given? Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode
of the operation panel Refer to 3.4.1 (Refer to page 58) Operation using the setting dial as the potentiometer
Refer to 3.4.2 (Refer to page 59) Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to
terminals Refer to 3.4.3 (Refer to page 60) Perform frequency setting using voltage input signal
Refer to 3.4.4 (Refer to page 61) Perform frequency setting using current input signal
Refer to 3.4.5 (Refer to page 62)
Operation cannot be performed at the set frequency ... Why? Did you carry out step 4 within 5s after step 3? (Did you press within 5s after turning ?)
The frequency does not change by turning ... Why? Check to see if the operation mode selected is the External operation mode. (Press to change to the PU operation mode.)
Operation does not change to the PU operation mode ... Why? Check that "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection. Check that the start command is not on.
Change acceleration time Pr. 7 (Refer to page 52) Change deceleration time Pr. 8 (Refer to page 52)
For example, limit the motor speed to 60Hz maximum. Set "60Hz" in Pr. 1. (Refer to page 51)
REMARKS
Press to show the set frequency.
can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to page 59)
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
FR-DU07
,
,
[Connection diagram]
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press to choose the PU
operation mode.
Flicker Frequency setting complete!!
6.To change the set frequency, perform the
operation in above steps 3 and 4.
(Starts from the previously set frequency.)
PU indication is lit.
7.Press to stop.
Flickers for about 5s
5.After the value flickered for about 3s,
the display returns to " " (monitor display).
Press (or ) to start operation. ( )
4.While the value is flickering,
press to set the frequency.
If you do not press , the value flickers for about 5s
and the display then returns to 0.00 (display) Hz.
At this time, return to "Step 3" and set the frequency again.
3.Turn to show the frequency
you want to set.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
DisplayOperation
3s later
59
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.4.2 Use the setting dial like a potentiometer to perform operation.
POINT
Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation example Change the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation
REMARKS If flickering "60.00" turns to "0.00", the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection setting may not be "1".
Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning .
CAUTION When using setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency (initial value is 120Hz for FR-B3 /
60Hz for FR-B). Adjust Pr.1 Maximum frequency setting according to the application.
DisplayOperation
PU indication is lit.
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
3. Change Pr. 161 to the setting value " ".
4.Press (or ) to start the inverter.
5.Turn until " " appears.
The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press . The frequency flickers for about 5s.
(Refer to page 45 for change of the setting.)
60
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
3.4.3 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed setting)
[Connection diagram]
POINT
Use / to give a start command. Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2) The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Refer to page 64 to change frequencies.) Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning on two (or three) terminals simultaneously.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
60Hz for the RH, 30Hz for the RM and 10Hz for the RL are not output when they are turned on ... Why? Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again. Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again. (Refer to page 51.) Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1", Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial values)
[FWD (or REV)] lamp is not lit ... Why? Check that wiring is correct. Check the wiring once again. Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "4".) (Refer to page 53.)
Change the frequency of the terminal RL, RM, and RH. ... How? Refer to page 64 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed), Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed), and Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
ON
ON
ON
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (
H z ) Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2 (Middle speed)
Speed 3 (Low speed)
Time
RH
RM
RL
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
RH
RM
RL
FR-DU07
,
SD
DisplayOperation
Flickering
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Change the Pr. 79 setting to " ".
3. Press the start switch (or ).
FWD (or REV) flickers.
When the frequency command is not
given, it flickers.
Flickering
4. Turn on the low speed switch (RL).
The output frequency increases to " ".
(10Hz) according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time.
5.Turn off the low speed switch (RL).
The output frequency decreases to " "
(0Hz) according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
6.Turn off the start switch .
FWD (or REV) turns off.
Low speed
Low speed
(Refer to page 45 for change of the setting.)
61
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.4.4 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input)
[Connection diagram] (The inverter supplies 5V of power to the frequency setting potentiometer.(Terminal 10))
POINT
Use / to give a start command.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2)
Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5V, initial value) Adjust the frequency in Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 67.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V, initial value) Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
5
10
2
FR-DU07
,
DisplayOperation
CAUTION When both the forward switch and reverse
switch turn on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switch turn on while running,
the inverter stops.
Flickering ( )
3. Start
Press the start switch (or ).
Operating status indication of FWD (or REV)
flickers.
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Change the Pr. 79 setting to " ".
Stop Flickering
5. Deceleration
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication decreases
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time until " "
(0.00Hz) is displayed and operating status
indication of FWD or REV flickers.
The motor stops.
6. Stop
Press .
Operating status indication of FWD (or REV)
turns off.
4. Acceleration constant speed
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication increases
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time until " "
(60Hz) is displayed.
(Refer to page 45 for change of the setting.)
62
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
3.4.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input)
[Connection diagram]
POINT
Use / to give a start command.
Turn the AU signal on. Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2)
REMARKS Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Change the frequency (60Hz) at the maximum value of potentiometer (at 20mA, initial value) Adjust the frequency in Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 69.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) at the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA, initial value) Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
5(-)
4(+)
AU
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
AU signal
FR-DU07
,
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
SD
CAUTION
When both the forward switch and reverse switch
turn on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switch turn on while running, the
inverter stops.
Flickering ( )
DisplayOperation
3. Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) is on.
Press the start switch (or ).
FWD or REV of operating status indication flickers.
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Change the Pr. 79 setting to " ".
Stop Flickering
5. Deceleration
Perform 4mA input.
The frequency value on the indication decreases
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time until " " (0.00Hz)
is displayed and the operating status indication of FWD or
REV flickers.
The motor stops.
6. Stop
Press .
FWD or REV of the operating status indication turns off.
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
4. Acceleration constant speed
Perform 20mA input.
The frequency value on the indication increases
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time until " "
(60.00Hz) is displayed.
(Refer to page 45 for change of the setting.)
63
Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3.5.1 Use the set frequency set by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given? Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panel Refer to 3.5.1(Refer to page 63) Give a frequency command by switch (multi-speed setting) Refer to 3.5.2 (Refer to page 64) Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device Refer to 3.5.3 (Refer to page 66) Perform frequency setting by a current output device Refer to 3.5.5 (Refer to page 68)
POINT [Connection diagram]
Switch STF(STR) signal on to give a start command.
Set "3" in Pr. 79 (External/PU combined operation mode 1).
Refer to page 58 for the set frequency by the operation panel.
REMARKS Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(all are initial values) When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection is set to "3", multi-speed operation (refer to page 64) is also valid.
When the inverter is stopped by of the operation panel (FR-DU07), and are
displayed alternately. 1. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
2. The display can be reset by .
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
FR-DU07
STR
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF
SD
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
The motor runs at the frequency set in the set
frequency mode of the operation panel. ON
Flickers for about 5s
4.Turn to change running frequency.
Display the frequency you want to set.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
2.Change the Pr. 79 setting to " ".
Forward rotation Reverse
rotation
Stop
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
The motor decelerates according to Pr. 8 Deceleration
time to stop. OFF
Flicker Frequency setting complete!!
5.While the value is flickering, press to set the
frequency.
If you do not press ,the value flickers for about
5s and the display then returns to (frequency
set at last time). At this time, return to "Step 3" and set
the frequency again. Forward rotation
Reverse
rotation
(Refer to page 45 for change of the setting.)
Flickering
64
Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3.5.2 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)
[Connection diagram]
POINT
Start command by terminal STF (STR) Frequency command by RH, RM, RL and STR signal
[EXT] must be lit. (When [PU] is lit, switch it to [EXT] with .)
The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Use Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6 to change.) Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning two (or three) terminals simultaneously. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Changing example Set "50Hz" in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) and turn on RH and STF (STR) signal to operate.
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
RH
RM
RL
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
SD
ON
ON
ON
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (
H z ) Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2 (Middle speed)
Speed 3 (Low speed)
Time
RH
RM
RL
ON
DisplayOperation
1. Power on operation mode check
For the initial setting, the inverter operates in
the External operation mode [EXT] when
powering on. Check that the operation
command indication is [EXT].
If not displayed, press to change to the
external [EXT] operation mode. If the operation
mode still does not change, set Pr. 79 to change to
the External operation mode.
2. Change the Pr. 4 setting to " ".
ON
ON
StopOFF
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
3. Turn on the high speed switch (RH).
5. Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
The motor stops according to Pr. 8
Deceleration time.
30Hz appears when RM is on and 10Hz
appears when RL is on.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
4. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
" "(50Hz) appears.
(Refer to page 45 for change of the setting.)
65
Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
[EXT] is not lit even when is pressed ... Why?
Switchover of the operation mode with is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
50Hz, 30Hz and 10Hz are not output from RH, RM and RL respectively when they are turned on. ... Why? Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again. Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again. (Refer to page 51) Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "0" or "2".) (Refer to page 53) Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1", Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial values)
[FWD (or REV)] is not lit. ... Why? Check that wiring is correct. Check it again. Check that "60" is set in Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection (or "61" is set in Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection)? (all are initial values)
How is the frequency setting from 4 to 7 speed ? The setting differs according to Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting). Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
Perform multi-speed operation more than 8 speed. ... How? Use the REX signal to perform the operation. Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
REMARKS External operation is fixed by setting "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection when you do not want to take
time pressing or when you want to use the current start command and frequency command. (Refer to page 53)
66
Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3.5.3 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input) [Connection diagram] (The inverter supplies 5V of power to frequency setting potentiometer. (Terminal 10))
When you want to operate in the External operation mode always at powering on or when you want to
save the trouble of input, set "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection to choose External operation mode always.
REMARKS Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61"). (all are initial values)
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
5
10
2
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
SD
CAUTION
2.Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
Operating status indication of FWD (or REV)
flickers.
4.Deceleration
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value of the indication
decreases according to Pr. 8 Deceleration
time until " " (0.00Hz) is displayed.
The motor stops.
5.Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
1.Power on operation mode check
For the initial setting, the inverter operates
in the External operation mode [EXT] when
powering on. Check that the operation
command indication is [EXT]. If not displayed,
press to change to the External [EXT]
operation mode. If the operation mode still
does not change, set Pr. 79 to change to the
External operation mode.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
ON
OFF
ON
Flickering
Flickering
Stop
When both the forward switch and reverse
switch are on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switches turn on while running,
the inverter decelerates to stop.
DisplayOperation
3.Acceleration constant speed
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication
increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until " " (60Hz) is displayed.
(Refer to page 53)
67
Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.5.4 Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5V, initial value)
The motor will not rotate ... Why? Check that [EXT] is lit. [EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value) or "2".
Use to lit [EXT]. Check that wiring is correct. Check once again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V, initial value) Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to the
chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).) When you want to compensate frequency setting, use terminal 1. For details, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).
Changing example When you want to use the 0 to 5VDC input frequency setting potentiometer to change the frequency at 5V from 60Hz (initial value) to 50Hz Adjust to output 50Hz at 5V voltage input. Set "50Hz" in Pr. 125.
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM-SD does not indicate exactly 50Hz ... Why? The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Set frequency at 0V using calibration parameter C2 and adjust the indicator using calibration parameter C0. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
REMARKS As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across terminals 2-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C4.)
4.Press to set.
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on and turn the potentiometer
(frequency setting potentiometer) clockwise to full slowly.
1.Turn until (Pr. 125) appears.
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the monitor/frequency monitor.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to show the present set value.
" "(60.00Hz)
Flicker 50Hz output at 5V input complete!!
3.Turn to change the set value
to " ". (50.00Hz)
(Refer to 3.5.3 steps 2 to 5)
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Pr.125
0
0 Frequency setting signal
100%
10V
Initial value
Bias
Gain
0 5V
C2
(Pr.902)
(Pr.902) (Pr.903)C3 C4
60Hz
68
Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3.5.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input)
[Connection diagram]
POINT
Switch STF(STR) signal on to give a start command. Turn the AU signal on. Set "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
REMARKS Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to the chapter 4 the Instruction Manual (applied).)
5(-)
4(+)
Three-phase
AC power supply
AU
Motor
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
AU signal
STFForward rotation start Reverse rotation start STR
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
SD
CAUTION
2.Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
FWD or REV of operation indication flickers.
5.Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
1.Power on operation mode check
For the initial setting, the inverter operates in
the External operation mode [EXT] when
powering on. Check that the operation
command indication is [EXT]. If not displayed,
press to change to the External [EXT]
operation mode. If the operation mode still does
not change, set Pr. 79 to change to the External
operation mode.
DisplayOperation
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
ON
OFF
ON
Flickering
Flickering
Stop
When both the forward switch and reverse
switch are on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switches turn on while running,
the inverter decelerates to stop.
4.Deceleration
Perform 4mA input.
The frequency value on the indication
decreases according to Pr. 8
Deceleration time until " " (0.00Hz) is
displayed and FWD or REV of the operating
status indication flickers.
The motor stops.
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
3.Acceleration constant speed
Perform 20mA input.
The frequency value on the indication
increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until " " (60.00Hz) is
displayed.
(Refer to page 53.)
69
Make a start and stop with terminals (External operation)
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
3.5.6 Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 20mA, initial value)
The motor will not rotate ... Why? Check that [EXT] is lit. [EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value) or "2".
Use to lit [EXT]. Check that the AU signal is on. Turn the AU signal on. Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA, initial value) Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Changing example When you want to use the 4 to 20mA input frequency setting potentiometer and change the frequency at 20mA from 60Hz (initial value) to 50Hz Adjust to output 50Hz at 20mA current input. Set "50Hz" in Pr. 126.
The frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals FM-SD does not indicate exactly 50Hz ... Why? The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Set frequency at 4mA using calibration parameter C5 and adjust the indicator using calibration parameter C0. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
REMARKS As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across terminals 4-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C7.)
PU EXT
4.Press to set the value.
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on to allow
20mA current to flow.
1.Turn until (Pr. 126) appears.
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to show the currently set value.
" " (60.00Hz)
3.Turn to change the set value to " ".
(50.00Hz)
Flicker 50Hz output at 20mA input complete!!
(Refer to 3.5.5 steps 2 to 5)
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Pr.126
0
Frequency setting signal
100%
Initial value
Bias
Gain
0
20
4 20mA
C5
(Pr.904)
C6 (Pr.904) (Pr.905)C7
60Hz
70
Parameter List
3.6 Parameter List
3.6.1 Parameter list
indicates simple mode parameters. The abbreviations in the explanations below indicate:
...indicates functions available with the FR-B series only
...indicates functions available with the FR-B3 series only. (Parameters without any indication are valid for both the FR-B and FR-B3 series.)
" " indicates enabled and "" indicates disabled of "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
M ax
im um
/m in
im um
fre
qu en
cy
1 Maximum frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 120Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *
0 to 120Hz
Set the upper limit of the output frequency. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
2 Minimum frequency 0.01Hz 0Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the lower limit of the output frequency. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
M ul
ti- sp
ee d
se tti
ng o
pe ra
tio n
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed)
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set frequency when the RH signal is on. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
0.01Hz 30Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set frequency when the RM signal is on. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed)
0.01Hz 10Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set frequency when the RL signal is on. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
24
27
Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7 speed)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. 9999: not selected * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
232
239
Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15 speed)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
B
B3
to
to
71
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
A cc
el er
at io
n/ de
ce le
ra tio
n tim
e se
tti ng
7 Acceleration time
0.1/ 0.01s 5/15s * 0 to 3600/360s
Set the motor acceleration time. * The initial value differs according to
the inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/ 11K or more)
8 Deceleration time
0.1/ 0.01s 5/15s * 0 to 3600/360s
Set the motor deceleration time. * The initial value differs according to
the inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/ 11K or more)
20
Acceleration/ deceleration reference frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz
1 to 120Hz/ 1 to 60Hz*
1 to 120Hz
Set the frequency referenced as acceleration/deceleration time. Set the frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20 for acceleration/deceleration time. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
21
Acceleration/ deceleration time increments
1 0
0 Increments: 0.1s Range: 0 to 3600s
The increments and setting range of acceleration/ deceleration time setting can be changed.
1 Increments: 0.01s Range: 0 to 360s
44
Second acceleration/ deceleration time
0.1/ 0.01s 5s 0 to 3600/360s Set the acceleration/deceleration
time when the RT signal is on.
45 Second deceleration time
0.1/ 0.01s 9999
0 to 3600/360s Set the deceleration time when the RT signal is on.
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
110
Third acceleration/ deceleration time
0.1/ 0.01s 9999
0 to 3600/360s Set the acceleration/deceleration time when the X9 signal is on.
9999 Function invalid
111 Third deceleration time
0.1/ 0.01s 9999
0 to 3600/360s Set the deceleration time when the X9 signal is on.
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
M ot
or p
ro te
ct io
n fro
m o
ve rh
ea t
(e le
ct ro
ni c
th er
m al
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
0.01/ 0.1A *
Rated inverter current
0 to 500/ 0 to 3600A *
Set the rated motor current. * The increments and setting range
differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
D C
in je
ct io
n br
ak e
10 DC injection brake operation frequency
0.01Hz 3Hz
0 to 120Hz
Set the operation frequency of the DC injection brake.
9999
Operate when the output frequency becomes less than or equal to Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
11 DC injection brake operation time
0.1s 0.5/0s* 0.5s
0 DC injection brake disabled
0.5s 0.1 to 10s
Set the operation time of the DC injection brake. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (55K or less/75K or more)
8888 Operated while the X13 signal is on.
12 DC injection brake operation voltage
0.1% 4/2%*
0 DC injection brake disabled
0.1 to 30%
Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque). * The initial value differs according to
the inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/ 11K or more)
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B3
B3
72
Parameter List
St ar
tin g
fre qu
en cy 13 Starting
frequency 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz Starting frequency can be set.
571 Holding time at a start 0.1s 9999
0.0 to 10.0s Set the holding time of Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
9999 Holding function at a start is invalid
Jo g
op er
at io
n
15 Jog frequency 0.01Hz 5Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 120Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency for jog operation. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
16
Jog acceleration/ deceleration time
0.1/ 0.01s 0.5s 0 to 3600/360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. Set the time taken to reach the frequency set in Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency for acceleration/ deceleration time. (Initial value is 60Hz) In addition, acceleration/deceleration time can not be set separately.
Lo gi
c se
le ct
io n
of o
ut pu
t s to
p si
gn al
(M R
S )
17 MRS input selection 1 0
0 Open input always
2 Normally closed input (NC contact input specifications)
4
External terminal:Normally closed input (NC contact input specifications)
Communication :Normally open input 18 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 20, 21 Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
73
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
St al
l p re
ve nt
io n
op er
at io
n
22 Stall prevention operation level 0.1% 150%
0 Stall prevention operation selection becomes invalid.
0.1 to 400% Set the current value at which stall prevention operation is started.
23
Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
0.1% 9999 0 to 200%
The stall operation level can be reduced when operating at a high speed above the rated frequency.
9999 Constant according to Pr. 22
48
Second stall prevention operation current
0.1% 150% 0 Second stall prevention operation
invalid
0.1 to 220% The stall prevention operation level can be set.
49
Second stall prevention operation frequency
0.01Hz 0Hz
0 Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.01 to 120Hz/ 0.01 to 60Hz*
0.01 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention operation of Pr. 48 is started. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
9999 Pr.48 is valid when the RT signal is on.
66
Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the stall operation level is started to reduce. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
114
Third stall prevention operation current
0.1% 150%
0 Third stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to 220% The stall prevention operation level can be set.
115
Third stall prevention operation frequency
0.01Hz 0
0 Third stall prevention operation invalid
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0.01 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention operation of Pr. 114 is started. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
148 Stall prevention level at 0V input
0.1% 150% 0 to 220% When "4" is set in Pr. 868 (Pr. 858), stall prevention operation level can be changed by the analog signal input to terminal 1 (terminal 4). 149
Stall prevention level at 10V input
0.1% 200% 0 to 220%
154
Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation
1 1
0 With voltage reduction
You can select whether to use output voltage reduction during stall prevention operation or not.
1 Without voltage reduction
156 Stall prevention operation selection
1 0 0 to 31, 100, 101
Pr. 156 allows you to select whether to use stall prevention or not according to the acceleration/ deceleration status.
157 OL signal output timer 0.1s 0s
0 to 25s Set the output start time of the OL signal output when stall prevention is activated.
9999 Without the OL signal output
858 Terminal 4 function assignment
Refer to page 100.
868 Terminal 1 function assignment
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
74
Parameter List
24 to 27 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
In pu
t c om
pe ns
at io
n of
m ul
ti- sp
ee d
an d
re m
ot e
se tti
ng
28
Multi-speed input compensation selection
1 0
0 Without compensation
1 With compensation
A cc
el er
at io
n/ de
ce le
ra tio
n pa
tte rn
a nd
b ac
kl as
h m
ea su
re s
29 Acceleration/ deceleration pattern selection
1 0
0 Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
3 Backlash measures
4 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
5 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D
140
Backlash acceleration stopping frequency
0.01Hz 1Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the stopping frequency and time for backlash measures. Valid when Pr. 29 = "3" * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
141 Backlash acceleration stopping time
0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s
142
Backlash deceleration stopping frequency
0.01Hz 1Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
143 Backlash deceleration stopping time
0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s
380 Acceleration S- pattern 1 1% 0% 0 to 50%
Valid when S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration C (Pr. 29 = 4) is set. Set the time taken for S-pattern from starting of acceleration/deceleration to linear acceleration as % to the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, etc.) An acceleration/deceleration pattern can be changed with the X20 signal.
381 Deceleration S- pattern 1 1% 0% 0 to 50%
382 Acceleration S- pattern 2 1% 0% 0 to 50%
383 Deceleration S- pattern 2 1% 0% 0 to 50%
516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
Valid when S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration D (Pr. 29 = 5) is set. Set the time taken for S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (S-pattern operation).
517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleration
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleration
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
75
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
S el
ec tio
n of
re ge
ne ra
tio n
un it
30 Regenerative function selection
1 0
0 Built-in brake, brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU )
1
High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR), Brake unit (MT-BU5) *1, Power regeneration converter (MT- RC) *1
2 High power factor converter (MT-HC) *1
70 Special regenerative brake duty
0.1% 0% 0 to 30%/0 to 10%*
You can set the brake duty when a brake unit or power regeneration converter is used. * Range differ according to the
inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
Av oi
d m
ec ha
ni ca
l re
so na
nc e
po in
ts
(fr eq
ue nc
y ju
m p)
31 Frequency jump 1A 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency jumps 9999: Function invalid * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
32 Frequency jump 1B 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
33 Frequency jump 2A 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
34 Frequency jump 2B 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
35 Frequency jump 3A 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
36 Frequency jump 3B 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999*
0 to 120Hz, 9999
Sp ee
d di
sp la
y an
d sp
ee d
se tti
ng
37 Speed display 1 0 0 Frequency display, setting
1 to 9998 Set the machine speed for Pr.505 Set frequency.
144 Speed setting switchover 1 4
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102,104, 106, 108, 110
Set the number of motor poles when displaying the motor speed.
505 Speed setting reference 0.01Hz 60Hz
1 to 120Hz/ 1 to 60Hz*
1 to 120Hz
Set the frequency that will be the basis of machine speed display. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
811
Easy gain tuning response level setting
1 0
0 Running speed increments 1r/min
1 Running speed increments 0.1r/min
*1 Compatible with the FR-B-75K or more.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
76
Parameter List
D et
ec tio
n of
o ut
pu t f
eq ue
cn y
(S U
, F U
, F U
2, F
U 3,
L S
si gn
al )
41 Up-to- frequency sensitivity
0.1% 10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns on.
42 Output frequency detection
0.01Hz 6Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency where the FU signal turns on. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
43
Output frequency detection for reverse rotation
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency where the FU signal turns on in reverse rotation. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
9999 Same as Pr. 42 setting
50 Second output frequency detection
0.01Hz 30Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency where the FU2 signal turns on. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
116 Third output frequency detection
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency where the FU3 signal turns on. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
865 Low speed detection 0.01Hz 1.5Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency where the LS signal turns on. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
44, 45 Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8. 48, 49 Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 23. 50 Refer to Pr. 41 to Pr. 43. 51 Refer to Pr. 9.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
77
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
C ha
ng e
of D
U /P
U m
on ito
r d es
cr ip
tio ns
C
um ul
at iv
e m
on ito
r c le
ar
52 DU/PU main display data selection
1 0
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 50 to 57, 100
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 34, 50 to 57, 100
Select monitor to be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit and monitor to be output to the terminal FM and AM. 0 : Output frequency (Pr. 52) 1 : Output frequency (Pr. 54, Pr. 158) 2 : Output current (Pr. 54, Pr. 158) 3 : Output voltage (Pr. 54, Pr. 158) 5 : Frequency setting 6 : Running speed 7 : Motor torque (FR-B3) 8 : Converter output voltage 9 : Regenerative brake duty 10 : Electronic thermal relay function
load factor 11 : Output current peak value 12 : Converter output voltage peak value 13 : Input power 14 : Output power 17 : Load meter 18 : Motor excitation current 20 : Cumulative energization time
(Pr. 52) 21 : Reference voltage output
(Pr. 54, Pr. 158) 22 : Orientation status* (Pr. 52) 23 : Actual operation time (Pr. 52) 24 : Motor load factor 25 : Cumulative power (Pr. 52) 34 : Motor output (FR-B3) 50 : Power saving effect 51 : Cumulative saving power (Pr. 52) 52 : PID set point 53 : PID measured value 54 : PID deviation (Pr. 52) 55 : Input/output terminal status (Pr. 52) 56 : Option input terminal status (Pr. 52) 57 : Option output terminal status (Pr. 52) 100 : Set frequency is displayed during a
stop and output frequency is displayed during operation (Pr. 52)
* Available only when the FR-A7AP is mounted.
54 FM terminal function selection
1 1
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14 17, 18, 21, 24, 50, 52, 53
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 34, 50, 52, 53
158 AM terminal function selection
1 1
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 50, 52, 53
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 34, 50, 52, 53
170 Watt-hour meter clear 1 9999
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
10 Set the maximum value when monitoring from communication to 0 to 9999kWh.
9999 Set the maximum value when monitoring from communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
171 Operation hour meter clear 1 9999 0, 9999
Set "0" to clear the operation time monitor. Setting "9999" has no effect.
268 Monitor decimal digits selection
1 9999 0 Displayed as integral value. 1 Displayed in 0.1 increments 9999 No fixed decimal position
563 Energization time carrying- over times
1 0 (0 to 65535) The numbers of cumulative energization time monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed. Reading only
564 Operating time carrying-over times
1 0 (0 to 65535) The numbers of operation time monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed. Reading only
867 AM output filter 0.01s 0.01s 0 to 5s Set the output filter of terminal AM.
891
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
1 9999
0 to 4 Set the number of times to shift the cumulative power monitor digit. Clamp the monitor value at maximum.
9999 No shift Clear the monitor value when it exceeds the maximum value.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
78
Parameter List
C ha
ng e
of th
e m
on ito
r ou
tp ut
fr om
te rm
in al
FM
a nd
A M
55 Frequency monitoring reference
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the full-scale value to output the output frequency monitor value to terminal FM and AM. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
56 Current monitoring reference
0.01/ 0.1A *
Rated inverter current
0 to 500/ 0 to 3600A *
Set the full-scale value to output the output current monitor value to terminal FM and AM. * The increments and setting range
differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
866 Torque monitoring reference
0.1% 150% 0 to 400%
Set the full-scale value to output the torque monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
R es
ta rt
op er
at io
n af
te r i
ns ta
nt an
eo us
po
w er
fa ilu
re
57 Restart coasting time 0.1s 9999
0
The coasting time is as follows: 1500 or less ....................... 0.5s 2200 to 7.5K....................... 1.0s 11K to 55K ......................... 3.0s 75K or more ....................... 5.0s
0.1 to 5s/ 0.1 to 30s *
Set the waiting time for inverter- triggered restart after an instantaneous power failure. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (55K or less/ 75k or more)
9999 No restart
58 Restart cushion time 0.1s 1s 0 to 60s Set a voltage starting time at restart.
162
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
1 0
0 With frequency search
1 Without frequency search (Reduced voltage system)
2 Encoder detection frequency 10 Frequency search at every start
11 Reduced voltage system at every start
12 Encoder detection frequency search at every start
163 First cushion time for restart
0.1s 0s 0 to 20s Set a voltage starting time at restart. Consider according to the magnitude of load (inertia moment/torque).
164 First cushion voltage for restart
0.1% 0% 0 to 100%
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart
0.1% 150% 0 to 220%
Consider the rated inverter current as 100% and set the stall prevention operation level during restart operation.
299
Rotation direction detection selection at restarting
1 0
0 Without rotation direction detection 1 With rotation direction detection
9999
When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is detected. When Pr. 78 = "1", "2", the rotation direction is not detected.
611 Acceleration time at a restart 0.1s 5/15s *
0 to 3600s
Acceleration time to reach Pr. 20 Acceleration/ deceleration reference frequency at a restart.
* The initial value differs according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)9999
Acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7 ).
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B3
79
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
R em
ot e
se tti
ng fu
nc tio
n
59 Remote function selection
1 0 0
RH, RM, RL signal function
Frequency setting storage function
Multi-speed setting
1 Remote setting Yes 2 Remote setting No
3 Remote setting
No (Turning STF/STR off clears remotely- set frequency.)
A ut
om at
ic a
cc el
er at
io n/
de ce
le ra
tio n
61 Reference current 0.01A 9999
0 to 500A
Setting value (rated motor current) is referenced
9999 Rated inverter current is referenced
62 Reference value at acceleration
0.1% 9999
0 to 220%
Setting value is a limit value
Shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode
Setting value is an optimum value
Optimum acceleration/ deceleration mode
9999
150% is a limit value
Shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode
100% is an optimum value
Optimum acceleration/ deceleration mode
63
Reference value at deceleration
0.1% 9999
0 to 220%
Setting value is a limit value
Shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode
Setting value is an optimum value
Optimum acceleration/ deceleration mode
9999
150% is a limit value
Shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode
100% is an optimum value
Optimum acceleration/ deceleration mode
292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration
1 0
0 Normal mode 1 Shortest
acceleration/ deceleration mode
Without brake
11 With brake
3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
7 Brake sequence mode 1 8 Brake sequence mode 2
293
Acceleration/ deceleration individual operation selection
1 0
0
Calculate acceleration/deceleration time of both acceleration and deceleration for the shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.
1 Calculate only acceleration time for the shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
2 Calculate only deceleration time for the shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B 3
B 3
B 3
80
Parameter List
R et
ry fu
nc tio
n at
a la
rm o
cc ur
re nc
e
65 Retry selection 1 0 0 to 5 A fault for retry can be selected.
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence
1 0
0 No retry function
1 to 10 Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. A fault output is not provided during retry operation.
101 to 110
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. (The setting value minus 100 is the number of retries.) A fault output is provided during retry operation.
68 Retry waiting time 0.1s 1s 0 to 10s
Set the waiting time from when an inverter fault occurs until a retry is made.
69 Retry count display erase 1 0 0 Clear the number of restarts
succeeded by retry.
66 Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 23. 67 to 69 Refer to Pr. 65. 70 Refer to Pr. 30.
M ot
or s
el ec
tio n
(a pp
lie d
m ot
or )
71 Applied motor 1 0
0 Thermal characteristics of a variable- torque motor
1 Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
C ar
rie r f
re qu
en cy
s el
ec tio
n
72 PWM frequency selection
1 1/2 *1 1 to 15/1, 2/2 *2
PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The setting displayed is in [kHz]. Note that 15 indicates 14.5kHz.
*1 The initial value differs according to the inverter capacity. (other than 200V 75K/200V 75K)
*2 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/400V 75K or more/ 200V 75K)
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
BB BB
81
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
An al
og in
pu t s
el ec
tio n
73 Analog input selection 1 1 0 to 7,
10 to 17
You can select the input specifications of terminal 2 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) and input specifications of terminal 1 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V). To change the terminal 2 to the voltage input specification (0 to 5V/ 0 to 10V), turn OFF(initial status) the voltage/current input switch 2. To change it to the current input(0 to 20mA), turn ON the voltage/current input switch 2. Override and reversible operation can be selected.
242
Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2)
0.1% 100% 0 to 100% Set the ratio of added compensation amount when terminal 2 is the main speed.
243
Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4)
0.1% 75% 0 to 100% Set the ratio of added compensation amount when terminal 4 is the main speed.
252 Override bias 0.1% 50% 0 to 200% Set the bias side compensation value of override function.
253 Override gain 0.1% 150% 0 to 200% Set the gain side compensation value of override function.
267 Terminal 4 input selection 1 0
0 Terminal 4 input 4 to 20mA
Turn ON the voltage/current input switch 1 (initial status).
1 Terminal 4 input 0 to 5V Turn OFF the
voltage/current input switch 1.2 Terminal 4 input
0 to 10V
R es
po ns
e le
ve l o
f a na
lo g
in pu
t an
d no
is e
el im
in at
io n 74 Input filter time
constant 1 1 0 to 8
The primary delay filter time constant for the analog input can be set. A larger setting results in slower response.
849 Analog input offset adjustment
0.1% 100% 0 to 200%
This function provides speed command by analog input (terminal 2) with offset and avoids frequency command to be given due to noise under 0 speed command.
R es
et s
el ec
tio n,
di
sc on
ne ct
ed P
U
de te
ct io
n
75
Reset selection/ disconnected PU detection/ PU stop selection
1 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17
You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR- DU07/FR-PU07/FR-PU04) connector detection function and PU stop function. For the initial value, reset always enabled, without disconnected PU detection, and with PU stop function are set.
O ut
pu t f
un ct
io n
of a
la rm
c od
e
76 Fault code output selection
1 0
0 Without fault code output 1 With fault code output
2 Fault code output at alarm occurrence only
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
82
Parameter List
P re
ve nt
io n
of
pa ra
m et
er re
w rit
e
77 Parameter write selection 1 0
0 Write is enabled only during a stop 1 Parameter write is disabled.
2 Parameter write is enabled in any operation mode regardless of operating status.
P re
ve nt
io n
of
re ve
rs e
ro ta
tio n
of th
e m
ot or
78
Reverse rotation prevention selection
1 0
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1 Reverse rotation disallowed
2 Forward rotation disallowed
O pe
ra tio
n m
od e
se le
ct io
n
79 Operation mode selection 1 0
0 External/PU switchover mode 1 Fixed to PU operation mode 2 Fixed to External operation mode
3 External/PU combined operation mode 1
4 External/PU combined operation mode 2
6 Switchover mode
7 External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
340 Communication startup mode selection
1 0
0 As set in Pr. 79.
1, 2
Started in the network operation mode. When the setting is "2", it will resume the pre-instantaneous power failure operation mode after an instantaneous power failure occurs.
10, 12
Started in the network operation mode. Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode from the operation panel. When the setting is "12", it will resume the pre-instantaneous power failure operation mode after an instantaneous power failure occurs.
S el
ec tio
n of
c on
tro l m
et ho
d
80 Motor capacity 0.01kW Inverter capacity Inverter
capacity Set the applied motor capacity.
81 Number of motor poles 1 4 4 The number of motor poles is always
four.
89 Speed control gain (magnetic flux vector)
0.1% 9999
0 to 200%
Motor speed fluctuation due to load fluctuation is adjusted during Advanced magnetic flux vector control. 100% is a referenced value.
9999 Gain matching with the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B 3
B 3
B 3
83
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
O ffl
in e
au to
tu ni
ng
82 Motor excitation current
0.01 9999 Reading only Cannot be set
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi motor con- stants
83 Rated motor voltage 0.1V 200/
400V * 0 to 1000V
Set the rated motor voltage(V). * The initial values differ according to
the voltage level. (200V/400V)
84 Rated motor frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 10 to
120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
90 Motor constant (R1) 0.001 9999
Reading only Cannot be set
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi motor constants
91 Motor constant (R2) 0.001 9999
Reading only Cannot be set
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi motor constants
92 Motor constant (L1)
0.001 (0.1mH) 9999
Reading only Cannot be set
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi motor constants
93 Motor constant (L2)
0.001 (0.1mH) 9999
Reading only Cannot be set
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi motor constants
94 Motor constant (X)
0.01 (0.1%) 9999
Reading only Cannot be set
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi motor constants
96 Auto tuning setting/status 1 0
0 Auto tuning is not performed
1 Tuning performed without motor running
101 Tuning performed with motor running
684 Tuning data unit switchover 1 0
0 Internal data converted value 1 Displayed in "A, , mH, %".
859 Torque current 0.01A 9999
Reading only Cannot be set
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi motor constants
89 Refer to Pr. 81. 90 to 94 Refer to Pr. 82 to Pr. 84.
96 Refer to Pr. 82 to Pr. 84.
110, 111 Refer to Pr. 7.
114, 115 Refer to Pr. 22.
116 Refer to Pr. 41.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B 3
B 3
B 3
84
Parameter List
R S
-4 85
c om
m un
ic at
io n
in iti
al s
et tin
g
117 PU communication station number
1 0 0 to 31
Specify the inverter station number. Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer.
118 PU communication speed
1 192 48, 96, 192, 384
Set the communication speed. The setting value 100 equals the communication speed. For example, the communication speed is 19200bps when the setting value is "192".
119 PU communication stop bit length
1 1
0 Stop bit length: 1bit data length: 8bit 1 Stop bit length: 2bit data length: 8bit 10 Stop bit length: 1bit data length: 7bit 11 Stop bit length: 2bit data length: 7bit
120 PU communication parity check
1 2 0 Without parity check 1 With odd parity check 2 With even parity check
121 Number of PU communication retries
1 1 0 to 10
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will come to trip.
9999 If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to trip.
122
PU communication check time interval
0.1s 9999
0 No PU connector communication
0.1 to 999.8s
Set the communication check time interval. If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the inverter will come to trip.
9999 No communication check
123
PU communication waiting time setting
1 9999 0 to 150ms
Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response.
9999 Set with communication data.
124
PU communication CR/LF selection
1 1
0 Without CR/LF
1 With CR
2 With CR/LF
342 Communication EEPROM write selection
1 0
0 Parameter values written by communication are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1 Parameter values written by communication are written to the RAM.
551
PU mode operation command source selection
1 2
1 RS-485 terminals are the command source when PU operation mode
2 PU connector is the command source when PU operation mode.
3 USB connector is the command source when PU operation mode.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
85
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
C ha
ng e
of a
na lo
g in
pu t f
re qu
en cy
, ad
ju st
m en
t o f v
ol ta
ge , c
ur re
nt in
pu t a
nd fr
eq ue
nc y
(c al
ib ra
tio n)
125
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain (maximum). * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
126
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain (maximum). (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value)) * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
241 Analog input display unit switchover
1 0 0 Displayed in % Select the unit
for analog input display.1 Displayed in V/mA
C2 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
0.01Hz 0Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 2 input. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
0.1% 0% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias side voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain side voltage of terminal 2 input.
C5 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
0.01Hz 0Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 4 input. (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value)) * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
0.1% 20% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias side current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value))
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain side current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. (Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value))
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
86
Parameter List
P ID
c on
tro l
127
PID control automatic switchover frequency
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the control is automatically changed to PID control. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
9999 Without PID automatic switchover function
128 PID action selection 1 10
10 PID reverse action Deviation value signal (terminal 1)11 PID forward action
20 PID reverse action Measured value input (terminal 4) Set value (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)
21 PID forward action
50 PID reverse action Deviation value signal input (LONWORKS, CC- Link communication)
51 PID forward action
60 PID reverse action Measured value, set value input (LONWORKS, CC- Link communication)
61 PID forward action
129 PID proportional band
0.1% 100% 0.1 to 1000%
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs. Gain K = 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
130 PID integral time 0.1s 1s
0.1 to 3600s
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the time required for only the integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control.
131 PID upper limit 0.1% 9999 0 to 100%
Set the upper limit value. If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
132 PID lower limit 0.1% 9999 0 to 100%
Set the lower limit value. If the measured value falls below the setting range, the FDN signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
133 PID action set point 0.01% 9999
0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
9999 Terminal 2 input voltage is the set point.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
87
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
P ID
c on
tro l
134 PID differential time 0.01s 9999
0.01 to 10.00s
For deviation lamp input, time (Td) required for providing only the manipulated variable for the proportional (P) action. As the differential time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change.
9999 No differential control.
575 Output interruption detection time
0.1s 1s 0 to 3600s
If the output frequency after PID operation remains lower than the Pr. 576 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575, the inverter stops operation.
9999 Without output interruption function
576 Output interruption detection level
0.01Hz 0Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the output interruption processing is performed. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
577 Output interruption cancel level
0.1% 1000% 900 to 1100% Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) at which the PID output interruption function is released.
140 to 143 Refer to Pr. 29. 144 Refer to Pr. 37.
P ar
am et
er u
ni t
la ng
ua ge
s w
itc ho
ve r
145 PU display language selection
1 0
0 Japanese
1 English 2 Germany 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian 6 Swedish 7 Finnish
148,149 Refer to Pr. 22.
D et
ec tio
n of
o ut
pu t c
ur re
nt (Y
12 s
ig na
l) D
et ec
tio n
of z
er o
cu rr
en t (
Y1 3
si gn
al )
150 Output current detection level 0.1% 150% 0 to 220%
Set the output current detection level. 100% is the rated inverter current.
151 Output current detection signal delay time
0.1s 0s 0 to 10s
Set the output current detection period. Set the time from when the output current has risen above the setting until the output current detection signal (Y12) is output.
152 Zero current detection level 0.1% 5% 0 to 220%
Set the zero current detection level. Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%.
153 Zero current detection time 0.01s 0.5s 0 to 1s
Set this parameter to define the period from when the output current drops below the Pr. 152 value until the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.
166 Output current detection signal retention time
0.1s 0.1s
0 to 10s Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is on.
9999 The Y12 signal on status is retained. The signal is turned off at the next start.
167
Output current detection operation selection
1 0 0 Operation continues when the Y12
signal is on
1 The inverter is brought to trip when the Y12 signal is on. (E.CDO)
154 Refer to Pr. 22.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
88
Parameter List
C on
di tio
n se
le ct
io n
of
fu nc
tio n
va lid
ity b
y th
e se
co nd
fu
nc tio
n se
le ct
io n
si gn
al
155
RT signal function validity condition selection
1 0
0 Second (third) function is immediately valid with on of the RT (X9) signal.
10
Second (third) function is valid only during the RT (X9) signal is on and constant speed operation. (invalid during acceleration/ deceleration)
156, 157 Refer to Pr. 22 . 158 Refer to Pr. 54 .
U se
r g ro
up fu
nc tio
n
160 User group read selection 1 0
0 All parameters can be displayed.
1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
9999 Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
172
User group registered display/batch clear
1 0 (0 to 16)
Displays the number of cases registered as a user group (reading only).
9999 Batch clear the user group registration
173 User group registration 1 9999 0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be registered to the user group. Read value is always "9999".
174 User group clear 1 9999 0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be cleared from the user group. Read value is always "9999".
O pe
ra tio
n se
le ct
io n
of th
e op
er at
io n
pa ne
l
161
Frequency setting/key lock operation selection
1 0
0 Setting dial frequency setting mode
Key lock invalid
1 Setting dial potentiometer mode
10 Setting dial frequency setting mode
Key lock valid
11 Setting dial potentiometer mode
162 to 165 Refer to Pr. 57. 166, 167 Refer to Pr. 150. 168, 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 170, 171 Refer to Pr. 52. 172 to 174 Refer to Pr. 160.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
89
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
Fu nc
tio n
as si
gn m
en t o
f i np
ut te
rm in
al
178 STF terminal function selection
1 60
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0: Low-speed operation command (RL)
1: Middle-speed operation command (RM)
2: High-speed operation command (RH)
3: Second function selection (RT) 4: Terminal 4 input selection (AU) 5: Jog operation selection (JOG) 6: Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure, flying start (CS)
7: External thermal relay input (OH) 8: Fifteen speed selection (REX) 9: Third function (X9) 10: Inverter operation enable signal (MT-
HC connection) (X10) 11: MT-HC connection,
instantaneous power failure detection (X11)
12: PU operation external interlock (X12)
13: External DC injection brake start (X13)
14: PID control valid terminal (X14) 15: Brake opening completion signal
(BRI) 16: PU-external operation switchover
(X16) 19: Load torque high-speed
frequency (X19) 20: S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration C switching terminal (X20)
22: Orientation command (X22) * 24: Output stop (MRS) 25: Start self-holding selection
(STOP) 60: Forward rotation command (STF)
(assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only)
61: Reverse rotation command (STR) (assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only)
62: Inverter reset (RES) 63: PTC thermistor input (PTC)
(assigned to AU terminal (Pr. 184) only)
64: PID forward/reverse action switchover (X64)
65: PU-NET operation switchover (X65)
66: External-NET operation switchover (X66)
67: Command source switchover (X67)
9999 : No function * Available only when used with the
FR-A7AP.
179 STR terminal function selection
1 61
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 61, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 22, 24, 25, 61, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
180 RL terminal function selection
1 0
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
181 RM terminal function selection
1 1
182 RH terminal function selection
1 2
183 RT terminal function selection
1 3
184 AU terminal function selection
1 4
0 to 12, 14,16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62 to 67, 9999
185 JOG terminal function selection
1 5
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
186 CS terminal function selection
1 6
187 MRS terminal function selection
1 24
188 STOP terminal function selection
1 25
189 RES terminal function selection
1 62
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
90
Parameter List
Te rm
in al
a ss
ig nm
en t o
f o ut
pu t t
er m
in al
190 RUN terminal function selection
1 0 0 to 8, 10 to 16, 25 to 28, 34, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 125 to 128, 134, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190 to 199, 9999
0 to 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 28, 34, 35, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90 to 99, 100 to 106, 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 128, 134, 135, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190 to 199, 9999
0, 100: Inverter running (RUN) 1, 101: Up to frequency (SU) 2, 102: Instantaneous power failure/
undervoltage (IPF) 3, 103: Overload alarm (OL) 4, 104: Output frequency detection
(FU) 5, 105: Second output frequency
detection (FU2) 6, 106: Third output frequency
detection (FU3) 7, 107: Regenerative brake pre-
alarm (RBP) 8, 108: Electronic thermal relay
function pre-alarm (THP) 10, 110:PU operation mode (PU) 11, 111: Inverter operation ready
(RY) 12, 112:Output current detection
(Y12) 13, 113:Zero current detection (Y13) 14, 114:PID lower limit (FDN) 15, 115:PID upper limit (FUP) 16, 116:PID forward/reverse rotation
output (RL) 20, 120:Brake opening request
(BOF) 25, 125:Fan fault output (FAN) 26, 126:Heatsink overheat pre-alarm
(FIN) 27, 127:Orientation in-position
(ORA) * 28, 128:Orientation error (ORM)* 34, 134:Low speed output (LS) 35, 135:Torque detection (TU) 45, 145:Inverter running and start
command is on (RUN3) 46, 146:During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure (retained until release) (Y46)
47, 147:During PID control activated (PID)
64, 164:During retry (Y64) 70, 170:PID output interruption
(SLEEP) 90, 190:Life alarm (Y90) 91, 191:Fault output 3 (power-off
signal) (Y91) 92, 192:Energy saving average
value updated timing (Y92) 93, 193:Current average value
monitor signal (Y93) 94, 194:Fault output 2 (ALM2) 95, 195:Maintenance timer signal
(Y95) 96, 196:Remote output (REM) 97, 197:Alarm output 2 (ER) 98, 198:Alarm output (LF) 99, 199:Fault output (ALM) 9999: No function 0 to 99: Positive logic 100 to 199: Negative logic * Available only when used with the
FR-A7AP.
191 SU terminal function selection
1 1
192 IPF terminal function selection
1 2
193 OL terminal function selection
1 3
194 FU terminal function selection
1 4
195 ABC1 terminal function selection
1 99
0 to 8, 10 to 16, 25 to 28, 34, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 125 to 128, 134, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 9999
0 to 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 28, 34, 35, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 106, 108 110 to 116, 120 125 to 128, 134, 135, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 9999
196 ABC2 terminal function selection
1 9999
232 to 239 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6. 241 Refer to Pr. 125 and Pr. 126. 242, 243 Refer to Pr. 73.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
91
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
In cr
ea se
c oo
lin g
fa n
lif e
244 Cooling fan operation selection
1 1
0
Operates at power on Cooling fan on/off control invalid (The cooling fan is always on at power on)
1
Cooling fan on/off control valid The fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to the temperature.
S el
ec tio
n of
m ot
or
st op
pi ng
m et
ho d
250 Stop selection 0.1s 9999
0 to 100s
The motor is coasted to a stop when the preset time elapses after the start signal is turned off. The motor is coasted to a stop (Pr. 250 - 1000)s after the start signal is turned off.
STF signal: Forward rotation start STR signal: Reverse rotation start
1000 to 1100s
STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse signal
9999 When the start signal is turned off, the motor decelerates to stop.
STF signal: Forward rotation start STR signal: Reverse rotation start
8888
STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse signal
In pu
t/o ut
pu t p
ha se
fa
ilu re
p ro
te ct
io n
se le
ct io
n
251
Output phase failure protection selection
1 1 0 Without output phase failure
protection
1 With output phase failure protection
872
Input phase failure protection selection
1 0 0 Without input phase failure
protection
1 With input phase failure protection
252, 253 Refer to Pr. 73.
D is
pl ay
o f t
he li
fe o
f t he
in ve
rte r p
ar ts
255 Life alarm status display 1 0 (0 to 15)
Display whether the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not. Reading only
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display
1% 100% (0 to 100%) Display the deterioration degree of the inrush current limit circuit. Reading only
257 Control circuit capacitor life display
1% 100% (0 to 100%) Display the deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor. Reading only
258 Main circuit capacitor life display
1% 100% (0 to 100%)
Display the deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor. Reading only The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring
1 0 0, 1
Setting "1" and turning the power supply off starts the measurement of the main circuit capacitor life. When the Pr.259 value is "3" after powering on again, the measuring is completed. Read the deterioration degree in Pr.258.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
92
Parameter List
O pe
ra tio
n at
in st
an ta
ne ou
s po
w er
fa ilu
re
261 Power failure stop selection 1 0
0 Coasting to stop When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output is shut off.
1 Without UV avoidance
When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.
11 With UV avoidance
2 Without UV avoidance
When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop. If power is restored during a power failure, the inverter accelerates again.
12 With UV avoidance
262
Subtracted frequency at deceleration start
0.01Hz 3Hz 0 to 20Hz
Normally operation can be performed with the initial value unchanged. But adjust the frequency according to the magnitude of the load specifications (moment of inertia, torque).
263 Subtraction starting frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
When output frequency Pr. 263 Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr. 262.
When output frequency < Pr. 263 Decelerate from output frequency
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
9999 Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr. 262.
264 Power-failure deceleration time 1
0.1/ 0.01s 5s 0 to 3600/
360s Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in Pr. 266.
265 Power-failure deceleration time 2
0.1/ 0.01s 9999
0 to 3600/ 360s
Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr. 266.
9999 Same slope as in Pr. 264
266
Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is switched from the Pr. 264 setting to the Pr. 265 setting. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
294 UV avoidance voltage gain 0.1% 100% 0 to 200%
Adjust response level at UV avoidance operation. A larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage change.
267 Refer to Pr. 73. 268 Refer to Pr. 52. 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
93
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
Lo ad
to rq
ue h
ig h
sp ee
d fre
qu en
cy c
on tro
l
270
Stop-on contact/load torque high- speed frequency control selection
1 0
0 Without stop-on contact control and load torque high-speed frequency control
1 Stop-on contact control
2 Load torque high speed frequency control
3 Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control
271
High-speed setting maximum current
0.1% 50% 0 to 220%
Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle speeds.
272
Middle-speed setting minimum current
0.1% 100% 0 to 220%
273 Current averaging range
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 273 1/2)Hz to (Pr. 273 )Hz can be achieved. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
9999 Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 5 1/2)Hz to (Pr. 5 )Hz is achieved.
274 Current averaging filter time constant
1 16 1 to 4000
Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the output current. (The time constant [ms] is 0.75 Pr. 274 and the initial value is 12ms.) A larger setting provides higher stability but poorer response.
St op
-o n
co nt
ac t c
on tro
l
275
Stop-on contact excitation current low- speed multiplying factor
0.1% 9999
0 to 1000%
Usually set a value between 130% and 180%. Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact control.
9999 No compensation.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B 3
B 3
B 3
94
Parameter List
B ra
ke s
eq ue
nc e
fu nc
tio n
278 Brake opening frequency 0.01Hz 3Hz 0 to
30Hz
Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + about 1.0Hz. This parameter may be only set if Pr. 278 Pr. 282.
279 Brake opening current 0.1% 130% 0 to
220%
Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to 90%. If the setting is too low, the load is liable to drop due to gravity at start. Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%.
280 Brake opening current detection time
0.1s 0.3s 0 to 2s Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to 0.3s.
281 Brake operation time at start
0.1s 0.3s 0 to 5s
Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened. Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to 0.2s.
282 Brake operation frequency
0.01Hz 6Hz 0 to 30Hz
At this frequency, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is switched off. Generally, set this parameter to the Pr. 278 setting + 3 to 4Hz. Setting is enabled only when Pr. 282 Pr. 278.
283 Brake operation time at stop
0.1s 0.3s 0 to 5s
Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0.1s. Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + about 0.2 to 0.3s.
284
Deceleration detection function selection
1 0
0 Deceleration is not detected.
1
If deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation, the inverter fault (E.MB2) is provided to trip and turn off the brake opening request signal (BOF).
285 Overspeed detection frequency
0.01Hz 9999 0 to 30Hz
When brake sequence function is valid under encoder feedback control If (detected frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 285 under encoder feedback control, the inverter fault (E.MB1) is provided to trip and turn off the brake opening request signal (BOF).
9999 Overspeed is not detected.
292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration
1 0 0, 1, 3, 7, 8, 11
Brake sequence function is valid when a setting is "7 or 8".
D ro
op c
on tro
l
286 Droop gain 0.1% 0%
0 Droop control is invalid
0.1 to 100%
Set the drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated motor frequency.
287 Droop filter time constant 0.01s 0.3s 0 to 1s
Set the time constant of the primary delay filter applied to the torque current.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B 3
B 3
B 3
B 3
B 3
B 3
95
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
P ul
se tr
ai n
I/O
291 Pulse train I/O selection 1 0
0 Input Output
JOG terminal FM output 1 Pulse train input FM output 10 JOG terminal Pulse train open
collector output (50% duty)11 Pulse train input
20 JOG terminal Pulse train open collector output (ON width is always same)
21
Pulse train input
100
Pulse train open collector output (ON width is always same (independently of Pr. 54))
384 Input pulse division scaling factor
1 0 0 to 250
Indicates division scaling factor to the input pulse and the frequency resolution to the input pulse changes according to the value.
385 Frequency for zero input pulse
0.01Hz 0
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency when the input pulse is 0 (bias). * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency when the input pulse is maximum (gain). * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
292, 293 Refer to Pr. 61. 294 Refer to Pr. 261. 299 Refer to Pr. 57.
R S
-4 85
c om
m un
ic at
io n
331 RS-485 communication station number
1 0 0 to 31 (0 to 247)
Set the inverter station number. (same specifications as Pr. 117 ) When "1" (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 551, the setting range within parenthesis is applied.
332 RS-485 communication speed
1 96 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384
Used to select the communication speed. (same specifications as Pr. 118)
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length
1 1 0, 1, 10, 11 Select stop bit length and data length. (same specifications as Pr. 119)
334
RS-485 communication parity check selection
1 2 0, 1, 2 Select the parity check specifications. (same specifications as Pr. 120)
335 RS-485 communication retry count
1 1 0 to 10, 9999
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error. (same specifications as Pr. 121)
336
RS-485 communication check time interval
0.1s 0s
0 RS-485 communication can be made, but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8s Set the communication check time interval. (same specifications as Pr. 122)
9999 No communication check
337
RS-485 communication waiting time setting
1 9999 0 to 150ms, 9999
Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response. (same specifications as Pr. 123)
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
96
Parameter List
R S
-4 85
c om
m un
ic at
io n
338
Communication operation command source
1 0 0 Start command source
communication
1 Start command source external
339
Communication speed command source
1 0
0 Frequency command source communication
1 Frequency command source external
2
Frequency command source external (Frequency command from communication is valid, frequency command terminal 2 is invalid)
341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
1 1 0, 1, 2 Select presence/absence of CR/LF. (same specifications as Pr. 124)
342 Communication EEPROM write selection
1 0
0 Parameter values written by communication are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1 Parameter values written by communication are written to the RAM.
343 Communication error count 1 0
Display the number of communication errors during Modbus-RTU communication. Read only. Displayed only when Modbus-RTU protocol is selected.
539
Modbus-RTU communication check time interval
0.1s 9999
0 Modbus-RTU communication can be made, but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8s Set the communication check time interval. (same specifications as Pr. 122)
9999 No communication check
549 Protocol selection 1 0
0 Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
After setting change, reset (switch power off, then on) the inverter. The setting change is reflected after a reset.
1 Modbus-RTU protocol
550
NET mode operation command source selection
1 9999
0 The communication option is the command source when NET operation mode.
1 RS-485 terminals are the command source when NET operation mode.
9999
Automatic communication option recognition Normally, RS-485 terminals are the command source. When a communication option is mounted, the communication option is the command source.
551
PU mode operation command source selection
1 2
1 RS-485 terminals are the command source when PU operation mode
2 PU connector is the command source when PU operation mode.
3 USB connector is the command source when PU operation mode.
340 Refer to Pr. 79.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
97
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
O rie
nt at
io n
co nt
ro l
350 Stop position command selection
1 9999
0 Internal stop position command (Pr.356)
1 External stop position command (FR-A7AX 16-bit data)
9999 Orientation control invalid
351 Orientation speed 0.01Hz 2Hz 0 to 30Hz
Decrease the motor speed to the set value when the orientation command (X22) is given.
352 Creep speed 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 0 to 10Hz As soon as the current position pulse reaches the creep switchover position set in Pr.353 after the speed has reached the orientation speed, the speed decelerates down to the creep speed set in Pr.352.
353 Creep switchover position
1 511 0 to 16383
354 Position loop switchover position
1 96 0 to 8191
As soon as the current position pulse reaches the set position loop switchover position, control is changed to position loop.
355 DC injection brake start position
1 5 0 to 255
After changed to position loop, DC injection brake is applied and the motor stops as soon as the current position pulse reaches the set DC injection brake start position.
356 Internal stop position command
1 0 0 to 16383
When "0" is set in Pr. 350, the internal position command is activated and the setting value of Pr. 356 becomes a stop position.
357 Orientation in- position zone 1 5 0 to 255 Set the in-position zone at a stop of
the orientation.
358 Servo torque selection 1 1 0 to 13 Functions at orientation completion
can be selected.
359 Encoder rotation direction
1 1
0
1
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
A
Encoder
CW
Clockwise direction as viewed
from A is forward rotation
CCW
A
Encoder
Counter clockwise direction as
viewed from A is forward rotation
98
Parameter List
O rie
nt at
io n
co nt
ro l
360 16 bit data selection 1 0
0 Speed command When 1 is set in Pr.350 and the option FR-A7AX is mounted, set a stop position using 16-bit data. Stop position command is input as binary regardless of the Pr.304 setting.
1
Position command 16 bit data is used as external posi- tion command as is.
2 to 127
Set the stop posi- tion dividing up to 128 stop positions at regular inter- vals.
361 Position shift 1 0 0 to 16383
Shift the origin using a compensation value without changing the origin of the encoder. The stop position is a position obtained by adding the setting value of Pr. 361 to the position command.
362 Orientation position loop gain
0.1 1 0.1 to 10
When servo torque function is selected using Pr.358, output frequency for generating servo torque increases to the creep speed of Pr.352 gradually according to the slope set in Pr.362. Although the operation becomes faster when the value is increased, a machine may hunt, etc.
363 Completion signal output delay time
0.1s 0.5s 0 to 5s
The orientation complete signal (ORA) is output delaying the set time after in-position zone is entered. Also, the signal turns off delaying the set time after in-position zone is out.
364 Encoder stop check time 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 5s
Orientation fault signal (ORM) is output when the encoder remains stopped for the set time without orientation completion in the state where no orientation complete signal (ORA) is output. ORM signal is output when orientation is not completed again in the set time in the state where ORA signal is output.
365 Orientation limit 1s 9999 0 to 60s
Measure the time taken after passing the creep switchover position and output the orientation fault signal (ORM) if orientation is not completed within the set time.
9999 Set to 120s.
366 Recheck time 0.1s 9999 0 to 5s
Turning off the start signal with orientation command (X22) on after stopping the motor by orientation control, the present position is checked again after the set time elapses and the orientation complete signal (ORA) or orientation fault signal (ORM) is output.
9999 Not checked.
369 Number of encoder pulses 1 1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of pulses of the encoder. Set the number of pulses before multiplied by four.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
99
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
E nc
od er
fe ed
ba ck
c on
tro l
359 Encoder rotation direction
1 1
0
1
367 Speed feedback range 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the region of speed feedback control. * The setting range differs according
to the inverter capacity (22K or less/30K or more)
9999 Encoder feedback control is invalid
368 Feedback gain 0.1 1 0 to 100 Set when the rotation is unstable or response is slow.
369 Number of encoder pulses 1 1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of pulses of the encoder. Set the number of pulses before multiplied by four.
O ve
rs pe
ed
de te
ct io
n
374 Overspeed detection level 0.01Hz 140Hz 0 to 400Hz
When the motor speed reaches or exceeds the speed set in Pr.374 during encoder feedback control, over speed (E.OS) occurs and stops the inverter output.
E nc
od er
s ig
na l
lo ss
d et
ec tio
n
376
Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection
1 0
0 Signal loss detection is invalid
1
Signal loss detection is valid When the encoder signal is lost during encoder feedback control, orientation control, or vector control, signal loss detection (E.ECT) is activated to stop the inverter output.
380 to 383 Refer to Pr. 29.
384 to 386 Refer to Pr. 291.
R em
ot e
ou tp
ut
fu nc
tio n
(R E
M s
ig na
l) 495 Remote output selection 1 0
0 Remote output data clear at powering off No remote
output data held at resetting1
Remote output data held at powering off
10 Remote output data clear at powering off Remote output
data held at resetting11
Remote output data held at powering off
496 Remote output data 1 1 0 0 to 4095
Output terminal can be switched on and off.
497 Remote output data 2 1 0 0 to 4095
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
A
Encoder
CW
Clockwise direction as viewed
from A is forward rotation
CCW
A
Encoder
Counter clockwise direction as
viewed from A is forward rotation
100
Parameter List
M ai
nt en
an ce
o f p
ar ts
503 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 (1 to 9998)
Display the cumulative energization time of the inverter in 100h increments. Reading only Writing the setting of "0" clears the cumulative energization time.
504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
1 9999 0 to 9998
Set the time taken until when the maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
9999 No function
505 Refer to Pr. 37. 516 to 519 Refer to Pr. 29.
In ve
rte r s
et up
u si
ng
U S
B c
om m
un ic
at io
n 547 USB communication station number
1 0 0 to 31 Specify the inverter station number.
548 USB communication check time interval
0.1s 9999
0
USB communication is enabled. However, the inverter will come to trip (E. USB) if operation is changed to PU operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8s Set the interval of communication check time.
9999 No communication check
539,549 Refer to Pr. 117. 550, 551 Refer to Pr. 338 and Pr. 339.
C ur
re nt
a ve
ra ge
v al
ue
m on
ito r s
ig na
l
555 Current average time 0.1s 1s 0.1 to 1.0s Set the time taken to average the
current during start bit output (1s).
556 Data output mask time 0.1s 0s 0.0 to 20.0s Set the time for not obtaining (mask)
transient state data.
557
Current average value monitor signal output reference current
0.01/ 0.1A *
Rated inverter current
0 to 500/ 0 to 3600A *
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value. * The increments and setting range
differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
563, 564 Refer to Pr. 52. 571 Refer to Pr. 13. 575 to 577 Refer to Pr. 127. 611 Refer to Pr. 57.
Sp ee
d sm
oo th
in g
co nt
ro l
653 Speed smoothing control
0.1% 0 0 to 200%
Vibration due to mechanical resonance influences the inverter control, causing the output current (torque) unstable. In this case, the output current (torque) fluctuation can be reduced to ease vibration by changing the output frequency.
665 Refer to Pr. 882. 684 Refer to Pr. 82. 811 Refer to Pr. 37. 849 Refer to Pr. 74.
Fu nc
tio n
as si
gn m
en t o
f an
al og
in pu
t t er
m in
al Terminal 4 function assignment
1 0
0 Frequency command
858 4 Stall prevention command
9999 No function
868 Terminal 1 function assignment
1 0
0 Frequency setting auxiliary
4 Stall prevention command
9999 No function
859 Refer to Pr. 82.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
BB
101
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
To rq
ue d
et ec
tio n
864 Torque detection 0.1% 150% 0 to
400%
You can make setting to output a signal if the motor torque exceeds the predetermined value.
865 Refer to Pr. 41. 866 Refer to Pr. 55. 867 Refer to Pr. 52. 868 Refer to Pr. 858. 872 Refer to Pr. 251.
Fa ul
t d ef
in iti
on
875 Restart cushion time 1 0
0 At occurrence of any fault, the base circuit is shut off immediately. At this time, the fault output also turns on.
1
At occurrence of external thermal operation (OHT), electronic thermal relay function (THM) or PTC thermistor operation (PTC) fault, the motor is decelerated to a stop and inverter trips. At occurrence of trips other than OHT, THM and PTC, the base circuit is shut off immediately. Same operation as when "0" is set is performed under position control.
R eg
en er
at io
n av
oi da
nc e
fu nc
tio n
882
Regeneration avoidance operation selection
1 0
0 Regeneration avoidance function invalid
1 Regeneration avoidance function is always valid
2 Regeneration avoidance function is valid only at constant speed
883 Regeneration avoidance operation level
0.1V 380 /760VDC* 300 to 800V
Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration avoidance operates. When the bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt to occur. However, the actual deceleration time increases. The set value must be higher than the power supply voltage * The initial value differs according to
the voltage level. (200V class / 400V class)
884
Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity
1 0
0 Regeneration avoidance by bus voltage change ratio is invalid
1 to 5
Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change. Setting: 1 5 Detection sensitivity: Low High
885
Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
0.01Hz 6Hz 0 to 10Hz
Set the limit value of frequency which rises at activation of regeneration avoidance function.
9999 Frequency limit invalid
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 200% Adjust responsiveness at activation of regeneration avoidance. Setting a larger value in Pr.886 will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage change. However, the output frequency could become unstable. When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr.886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr.665.
665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 200%
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
B 3
B 3
B 3
2
102
Parameter List
Fr ee
pa
ra m
et er
888 Free parameter 1 1 9999 0 to 9999
Parameters you can use for your own purposes. Used for maintenance, management, etc. by setting a unique number to each inverter when multiple inverters are used.
889 Free parameter 2 1 9999 0 to 9999
891 Refer to Pr. 52.
E ne
rg y
sa vi
ng m
on ito
r
892 Load factor 0.1% 100% 30 to 150%
Set the load factor for commercial power-supply operation. This value is used to calculate the power consumption estimated value during commercial power supply operation.
893
Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
0.01/ 0.1kW *
Inverter rated capacity
0.1 to 55/ 0 to 3600kW *
Set the motor capacity (pump capac- ity). Set when calculating power saving rate and average power saving rate value. * The increments and setting range
differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
894
Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
1 0
0 Discharge damper control (fan) 1 Inlet damper control (fan) 2 Valve control (pump)
3 Commercial power-supply drive (fixed value)
895 Power saving rate reference value
1 9999
0 Consider the value during commercial power-supply operation as 100%
1 Consider the Pr. 893 setting as 100%.
9999 No function
896 Power unit cost 0.01 9999 0 to 500
Set the power unit cost. Display the power saving rate on the energy saving monitor
9999 No function
897 Power saving monitor average time
1h 9999 0 Average for 30 minutes 1 to 1000h Average for the set time 9999 No function
898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear
1 9999
0 Cumulative monitor value clear
1 Cumulative monitor value hold
10 Cumulative monitor continue (communication data upper limit 9999)
9999 Cumulative monitor continue (communication data upper limit 65535)
899 Operation time rate (estimated value)
0.1% 9999 0 to 100%
Use for calculation of annual power saving amount. Set the annual operation ratio (consider 365 days 24hr as 100%).
9999 No function
A dj
us tm
en t o
f te
rm in
al F
M
an d
A M
C0 (900)
FM terminal calibration --- --- ---
Calibrate the scale of the meter connected to terminal FM. (Only when Pr. 291 = 0, 1)
C1 (901)
AM terminal calibration --- --- --- Calibrate the scale of the analog
meter connected to terminal AM.
C2(902) to C7(905)
Refer to Pr. 125 and Pr. 126.
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
103
Parameter List
P ar
am et
er L
is t
3 D
R IV
E TH
E M
O TO
R
989 Parameter copy alarm release
1 10/100 * 10, 100
Parameters for alarm release at parameter copy * The initial value differs according to
the inverter capacity. (55K or less/ 75k or more)
Bu zz
er c
on tro
l of
th e
op er
at io
n pa
ne l
990 PU buzzer control 1 1
0 Without buzzer
1 With buzzer
P U
c on
tra st
ad
ju st
m en
t
991 PU contrast adjustment 1 58 0 to 63
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR- PU07) can be performed. 0 (Light) 63 (Dark)
P ar
am et
er c
le ar
, pa
ra m
et er
c op
y
Pr.CL Parameter clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" returns all parameters except calibration
parameters to the initial values.
ALLC All parameter clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" returns all parameters to the initial values.
Er.CL Faults history clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" will clear eight past faults.
PCPY Parameter copy 1 0
0 Cancel 1 Read the source parameters to the operation panel.
2 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the destination inverter.
3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Fu nc
tio n Parameter
Name Incre ments
Initial Value Range Description
Para meter copy
Para meter clear
All para
meter clear
R el
at ed
pa
ra m
et er
s
: enabled : disabledFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
104
Reset method of protective function
4 TROUBLESHOOTING When a fault occurs in the inverter, the inverter trips and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following fault or alarm indications. If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales representative. Retention of fault output signal........... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter is
opened when a fault occurs, the inverter's control power will be lost and the fault output will not be held.
Fault or alarm indication ..................... When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically switches to the fault or alarm indication.
Resetting method ............................... When a fault occurs, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset, therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 104.)
When any fault occurs, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation. Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are roughly divided as below.
(1) Error Message A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR- PU04 /FR-PU07) is displayed. The inverter does not trip.
(2) Warnings The inverter does not trip even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a fault.
(3) Alarm The inverter does not trip. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
4.1 Reset method of protective function (1) Resetting the inverter The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Operation 1: ..... Using the operation panel, press to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when a fault occurs (Refer to page 110 for fault.))
Operation 2:...... Switch OFF the power once, then switch it ON again after the indicator of the operation panel turns OFF.
Operation 3: ..... Turn on the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a reset status.)
ON
OFF
Inverter
RES
SD
105
List of fault or alarm display
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
4.2 List of fault or alarm display
*1 If an error occurs when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on the FR-PU04.
*2 Appears only for the FR-B3 series.
Operation Panel Indication Name Refer
to
E rr
or m
es sa
ge
E - - - Faults history 120
HOLD Operation panel lock 106
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error 106
rE1 to 4 Copy operation error 107
Err. Error 107
W ar
ni ng
s
OL Stall prevention (overcurrent) 108
oL Stall prevention (overvoltage) 108
RB Regenerative brake prealarm 109
TH Electronic thermal relay function prealarm 109
PS PU stop 108
MT Maintenance signal output 109
CP Parameter copy 109
Al ar
m FN Fan fault 109
Fa ul
t
E.OC1 Overcurrent trip during acceleration 110
E.OC2 Overcurrent trip during constant speed 110
E.OC3 Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop 110
E.OV1 Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration 110
E.OV2 Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed 111
E.OV3 Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop 111
E.THT Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) 111
E.THM Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) 111
E.FIN Fin overheat 112
E.IPF Instantaneous power failure 112
E.BE Brake transistor alarm detection 112
E.UVT Undervoltage 112
E.ILF*1 Input phase loss 113
E.OLT Stall prevention 113
to
to
Fa ul
t
E.GF Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent 113
E.LF Output phase loss 113
E.OHT External thermal relay operation *2
113
E.PTC*1 PTC thermistor operation 114
E.OPT Option fault 114
E.OP3 Communication option fault 114
E. 1 to E. 3 Option fault 114
E.PE Parameter storage device fault 115
E.PUE PU disconnection 115
E.RET Retry count excess 115
E.PE2*1 Parameter storage device fault 115
/ /
E. 6 / E. 7 /
E.CPU CPU fault 115
E.CTE Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
116
E.P24 24VDC power output short circuit 117
E.CDO*1 Output current detection value exceeded 117
E.IOH*1 Inrush current limit circuit fault 117
E.SER*1 Communication fault (inverter) 117
E.AIE*1 Analog input fault 117
E.EP*2 Encoder phase error 117 E.MB1
to E.MB7
Brake sequence fault 116
E.OS Overspeed occurence 116
E.ECT Signal loss detection 116
E.USB*1 USB communication fault 118
E.13 Internal circuit fault 118
Operation Panel Indication Name Refer
to
to
to
106
Causes and corrective actions
4.3 Causes and corrective actions (1) Error Message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off. Operation Panel
Indication HOLD
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than is made invalid. (Refer to page 43.)
Check point --------------
Corrective action Press for 2s to release lock.
Operation Panel Indication Er1
Name Write disable error
Description
1. You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable parameter write.
2. Frequency jump setting range overlapped. 3. Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped 4. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication
Check point
1. Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
2. Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
3. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
Operation Panel Indication Er2
Name Write error during operation
Description When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled independently of operating status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is on.
Check point 1. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).) 2. Check that the inverter is not operating.
Corrective action 1. Set "2" in Pr. 77. 2. After stopping operation, make parameter setting.
Operation Panel Indication Er3
Name Calibration error Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check point Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel Indication Er4
Name Mode designation error Description You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
Check point 1. Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode". 2. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action 1. After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page
53.) 2. After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.
107
Causes and corrective actions
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
Operation Panel Indication rE1
Name Parameter read error Description An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading. Check point --------------
Corrective action Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 47.) Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication rE2
Name Parameter write error
Description 1. You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation. 2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Check point Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
Corrective action 1. After stopping operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 47.) 2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication rE3
Name Parameter verification error
Description 1. Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different. 2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check point Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
Corrective action 1. Press to continue verification.
Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 40.) 2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication rE4
Name Model error
Description 1. A different model was used for parameter write and verification during parameter copy. 2. When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped
Check point 1. Check that the verified inverter is the same model. 2. Check that the power is not turned off or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
Corrective action 1. Use the same model (FR-B, B3 series(A700 specifications)) for parameter copy and verification. 2. Perform parameter copy read again.
Operation Panel Indication Err.
Description
1. The RES signal is on 2. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector) 3. When the voltage drops in the inverter's primary side. 4. When the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to a separate power, it may appear at turning on of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
Corrective action 1. Turn off the RES signal. 2. Check the connection of the PU and inverter. 3. Check the voltage on the inverter's primary side.
108
Causes and corrective actions
(2) Warnings When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off. Operation Panel
Indication OL FR-PU04 FR-PU07 OL
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
Description
During acceleration
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency again.
During constant- speed operation
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.
During deceleration
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function decreases the frequency again.
Check point
1. Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small. 2. Check that the load is not too heavy. 3. Are there any failure in peripheral devices? 4. Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
Check the motor for use under overload. 5. Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
Corrective action
1. Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 52.) 2. Reduce the load weight. 3. Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is
150%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
Operation Panel Indication oL FR-PU04
FR-PU07 oL
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
Description During deceleration
If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in frequency to prevent overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative energy has decreased, deceleration resumes.
If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to prevent overvoltage trip. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction. Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? (Refer to the chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
Operation Panel Indication PS FR-PU04
FR-PU07 PS
Name PU stop
Description Stop with of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr.
75, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Corrective action Turn the start signal off and release with .
109
Causes and corrective actions
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G (3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).))
Operation Panel Indication RB FR-PU04
FR-PU07 RB
Name Regenerative brake prealarm
Description
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty value. When the setting of Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty is the initial value (Pr. 70 = "0"), this warning does not occur. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs. The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point Check that the brake resistor duty is not high. Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
Corrective action Increase the deceleration time. Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.
Operation Panel Indication TH FR-PU04
FR-PU07 TH
Name Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
Description
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload trip (E. THM) occurs. The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point 1. Check for large load or sudden acceleration. 2. Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 50.)
Corrective action 1. Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times. 2. Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 50.)
Operation Panel Indication MT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 MT Name Maintenance signal output
Description Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time. When the setting of Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial value (Pr. 504 = "9999"), this warning does not occur.
Check point The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time setting. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erraces the signal.
Operation Panel Indication CP FR-PU04
FR-PU07 CP Name Parameter copy
Description Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or less and 75K or more. Check point Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.158, Pr.557 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
Operation Panel Indication FN FR-PU04
FR-PU07 FN
Name Fan fault
Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check point Check the cooling fan for a fault. Corrective action Check for fan fault. Please contact your sales representative.
110
Causes and corrective actions
(4) Fault When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
Operation Panel Indication E.OC1 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OC During Acc
Name Overcurrent trip during acceleration
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point
1. Check for sudden acceleration. 2. Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application. 3. Check for output short circuit. 4. Check that stall prevention operation is correct. 5. Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent due to increase in motor current occurs.)
Corrective action
1. Increase the acceleration time. (Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
2. When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter. If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
3. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur. 4. Perform a correct stall prevention operation. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(applied).)
Operation Panel Indication E.OC2 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OC
Name Overcurrent trip during constant speed
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point 1. Check for sudden load change. 2. Check for output short circuit. 3. Check that stall prevention operation is correct
Corrective action
1. Keep load stable. 2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit. 3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel Indication E.OC3 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OC During Dec
Name Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated inverter current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point 1. Check for sudden speed reduction. 2. Check for output short circuit. 3. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake. 4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action
1. Increase the deceleration time. 2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit. 3. Check the mechanical brake operation. 4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel Indication E.OV1 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OV During Acc
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
Description If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration with lifting load) Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not lower than the no load current.
Corrective action Decrease the acceleration time. Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).) Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
111
Causes and corrective actions
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
*1 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
Operation Panel Indication E.OV2 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OV
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
Description If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden load change. Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not lower than the no load current.
Corrective action
Keep load stable. Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied).) Use the regeneration unit as required. When using the regeneration unit with 55kW or less, another
explosion-proof test is necessary. Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
Operation Panel Indication E.OV3 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OV During Dec
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
Description If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
Corrective action
Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
Decrease the braking duty. Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied).) Use the regeneration unit as required. When using the regeneration unit with 55kW or less, another
explosion-proof test is necessary.
Operation Panel Indication E.THT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Inv. Overload
Name Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) *1
Description If a current not less than 150% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent trip does not occur (220% or less), the electronic thermal relay activate to stop the inverter output in order to protect the output transistors. (Overload capacity 150% 60s inverse-time characteristic)
Check point 1.Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short. 2.Check the motor for use under overload.
Corrective action 1.Increase acceleration/deceleration time. 2.Reduce the load weight.
Operation Panel Indication E.THM FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Motor Ovrload
Name Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) *1
Description
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the I2t value reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output when the I2t value reaches the specified value. When running a special motor such as a multi-pole motor, provide a thermal relay on the inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Check point 1. Check the motor for use under overload. 2. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action
1. Reduce the load weight. 2. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor. 3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied).)
112
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel Indication E.FIN FR-PU04
FR-PU07 H/Sink O/Temp
Name Fin overheat
Description
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output. The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink overheat protection operation temperature. For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or "126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point 1. Check for too high surrounding air temperature. 2. Check for heatsink clogging. 3. Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that is displayed on the operation panel.)
Corrective action 1. Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications. 2. Clean the heatsink. 3. Replace the cooling fan.
Operation Panel Indication E.IPF FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Inst. Pwr. Loss
Name Instantaneous power failure
Description
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to trip the inverter in order to prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the fault output is not provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/ deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration. When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
Corrective action Remedy the instantaneous power failure. Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure. Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel Indication E.BE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Br. Cct. Fault
Name Brake transistor alarm detection Appears only for the 75K or more.
Description This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors. In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.
Check point Reduce the load inertia. Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
Corrective action Replace the inverter.
Operation Panel Indication E.UVT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Under Voltage
Name Undervoltage
Description
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In addition, the motor torque wiil be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage decreases below about 150VAC (300VAC for the 400V class), this function stops the inverter output. When a jumper is not connected across P/+-P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated. When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point 1. Check for start of large-capacity motor. 2. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+-P1.
Corrective action 1. Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply. 2. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+-P1.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
113
Causes and corrective actions
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
Operation Panel Indication E.ILF FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Input phase loss Name Input phase loss
Description Inverter trips when function valid setting (=1) is selected in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection and one phase of the three phase power input is lost. When the setting of Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection is the initial value (Pr. 872 ="0"), this warning does not occur. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
Corrective action Wire the cables properly. Repair a break portion in the cable. Check the Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection setting.
Operation Panel Indication E.OLT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Stll Prev STP ( OL shown during stall prevention operation)
Name Stall prevention
Description If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears and trips the inverter. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
Check point Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).) Check that the Pr. 865 Low speed detection values are correct. (Check the Pr. 22 Stall prevention
operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
Corrective action Reduce the load weight. Change the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr. 865 Low speed detection values. (Check the Pr. 22
Stall prevention operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
Operation Panel Indication E.GF FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Ground Fault
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
Description This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth (ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check point Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable. Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication E.LF FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E. LF
Name Output phase loss
Description This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost.
Check point Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.) Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
Corrective action Wire the cables properly. Check the Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection setting.
Operation Panel Indication E.OHT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OH Fault
Name External thermal relay operation
Description If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped. Functions when "7" (OH signal) is set in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). When the initial value (without OH signal assigned) is set, this protective function does not function.
Check point Check for motor overheating. Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
Corrective action Reduce the load and operating duty. Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
114
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel Indication E.PTC FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 PTC activated Name PTC thermistor operation
Description
Stops the inverter output when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor input connected to the terminal AU. This fault functions when "63" is set in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection and AU/PTC switchover switch is set in PTC side. When the initial value (Pr. 184 = "4") is set, this protective function does not function.
Check point
Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal protector. Check the motor for operation under overload. Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).) Corrective action Reduce the load weight.
Operation Panel Indication E.OPT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Option Fault
Name Option fault
Description Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when a high power factor converter is connected. Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check point Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high power factor converter (MT-HC) is connected.
Corrective action
Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring. The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative. Check for connection of the plug-in option. Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
Operation Panel Indication E.OP3 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Option 3 Fault
Name Communication option fault Description Stops the inverter output when a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
Check point Check for a wrong option function setting and operation. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. Check for a break in the communication cable. Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
Corrective action Check the option function setting, etc. Connect the plug-in option securely. Check the connection of communication cable.
Operation Panel Indication
E. 1 to E. 3
FR-PU04 FR-PU07 Fault 1 to Fault 3
Name Option fault
Description Stops the inverter output if a contact faullt or the like of the connector between the inverter and communication option occurs or if a communication option is fitted to the connector 1 or 2. Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check point
1. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. (1 to 3 indicate the option connector numbers.)
2. Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter. 3. Check that the communication option is not fitted to the connector 1 or 2.
Corrective action
1. Connect the plug-in option securely. 2. Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative or distributor.
3. Fit the communication option to the connector 3. 4. Return the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer
to instruction manual of each option)
to
115
Causes and corrective actions
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
Operation Panel Indication E.PE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Corrupt Memry
Name Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) Description Stops the inverter output if fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure) Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative. When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable RAM write. Note that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.
Operation Panel Indication E.PE2 FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 PR storage alarm Name Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Description Stops the inverter output if fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure) Check point
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication E.PUE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 PU Leave Out
Name PU disconnection
Description
This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU communication retries during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken within the period of time set in Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
Check point Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly. Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.
Operation Panel Indication E.RET FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Retry No Over
Name Retry count excess
Description If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the inverter. Functions only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set. When the initial value (Pr. 67 = "0") is set, this protective function does not function.
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
Operation Panel Indication
E. 5
FR-PU04 FR-PU07
Fault 5
E. 6 Fault 6
E. 7 Fault 7
E.CPU CPU Fault
Name CPU fault Description Stops the inverter output if the communication error of the built-in CPU occurs. Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Corrective action Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter. Please contact your sales representative.
116
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel Indication E.CTE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E.CTE Name Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
Description
When the operation panel power supply (PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off power output and stops the inverter output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. When the internal power supply for the RS-485 terminals are shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made. To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power off, then on again.
Check point 1. Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable. 2. Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
Corrective action 1. Check the PU and cable. 2. Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals
Operation Panel Indication E.MB1 to 7
FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E.MB1 Fault to E.MB7 Fault
Name Brake sequence fault
Description The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285). This protective function does not function in the initial status (brake sequence function is invalid). (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied) )
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly.
Operation Panel Indication E.OS FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E. OS
Name Overspeed occurence
Description Stops the inverter output when the motor speed exceeds the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level during encoder feedback control. This protective function does not function in the initial status.
Check point Check that the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value is correct. Check that the number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number of encoder pulses.
Corrective action Set the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value correctly. Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.
Operation Panel Indication E.ECT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E. ECT
Name Signal loss detection
Description Trips the inverter output when the encoder signal is shut off under orientation control, encoder feedback control. This protective function does not function in the initial status.
Check point
Check for the encoder signal loss. Check that the encoder specifications are correct. Check for a loose connector. Check that the switch setting of the FR-A7AP is correct. Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Or, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter.
Corrective action
Remedy the signal loss. Use an encoder that meets the specifications. Make connection securely. Make a switch setting of the FR-A7AP correctly. Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the
power is supplied to the inverter. If the power is supplied to the encoder after the inverter, check that the encoder signal is securely sent and set "0" in Pr. 376.
to
117
Causes and corrective actions
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
Operation Panel Indication E.EP FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 E.EP Name Encoder phase error
Description Stops the inverter output when the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the encoder. This protective function does not function in the initial status.
Check point Check for mis-wiring of the encoder cable. Check for wrong setting of Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction.
Corrective action Perform connection and wiring securely. Change the Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction value.
Operation Panel Indication E.P24 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E.P24
Name 24VDC power output short circuit
Description When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again.
Check point Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output. Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication E.CDO FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 OC detect level Name Output current detection value exceeded
Description Stops the inverter output when the output current exceeds the setting of Pr. 150 Output current detection level. Functions when Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection is set to "1". When the initial value (Pr. 167 = "0") is set, this protective function does not function.
Check point Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time, Pr. 166 Output current detection signal retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel Indication E.IOH FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Inrush overheat Name Inrush current limit circuit fault
Description Stops the inverter output when the resistor of inrush current limit circuit overheated. The inrush current limit circuit failure
Check point Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Corrective action Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated. If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication E.SER FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 VFD Comm error Name Communication fault (inverter)
Description This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring. Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.
Operation Panel Indication E.AIE FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Analog in error Name Analog input fault
Description Stops the inverter output when 30mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5V or more) is input with the terminal 2/4 set to current input.
Check point Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection and Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. (Refer to Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection to voltage input.
118
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel Indication E.USB FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 USB comm error Name USB communication fault
Description When the time set in Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval has broken, this function stops the inverter output.
Check point Check the USB communication cable.
Corrective action
Check the Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval setting. Check the USB communication cable. Increase the Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval setting. Or, change the setting to 9999.
(Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))
Operation Panel Indication E.13 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Fault 13
Name Internal circuit fault Description Stops the inverter output when an internal circuit error occurred.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
CAUTION If protective functions of E.ILF, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.EP, E.OD, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE, E.USB are activated when using the
FR-PU04, "Fault 14" appears. Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
119
Correspondences between digital and actual characters
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel.
Actual Digital
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Actual Digital
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
D
Actual Digital
M
N
O
o
P
T
U
V
r
-
S
120
Check and clear of the faults history
4.5 Check and clear of the faults history (1) Check for the faults history
* The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
Faults history
Monitor/frequency setting
[Operation panel is used
for operation]
Parameter setting
[Parameter setting change]
[Operation for displaying faults history]
Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no alarm exists, is displayed.
Output current
Flickering
Output voltage
Flickering
Flickering
Flickering
Press the
setting
dial.
Press the
setting
dial.
Press the
setting
dial.
Energization time
Faults history number
(The number of past faults is displayed.)
Flickering
Output frequency
Flickering Flickering
*
121
Check and clear of the faults history
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
The faults history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Faults history clear.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.Turn until (faults history clear)
appears.
Flicker Faults history clear complete!!
6.Press to set.
4.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Press to read another parameter.
5.Turn to change it to the
setting value " ".
The parameter
number previously
read appears.
122
Check first when you have a trouble
4.6 Check first when you have a trouble
POINT
If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (initial value) then reset the required parameter values and check again.
Check that Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is not selected.
4.6.1 Motor does not start
1) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided). Check that the motor is connected properly. Check that the jumper across P/+-P1 is connected.
2) Check the input signals
Check that start signal is input. Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input simultaneously. Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero. (When the frequency command is 0Hz and the start command is entered, FWD or REV LED on the operation panel flickers.) Check that the AU signal is on when terminal 4 is used for frequency setting signal. Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on. Check that the CS signal is not OFF with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr. 57 "9999"). Check that the sink or source jumper connector is fitted securely. (Refer to page 22)
3) Check the parameter settings
Check that the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is correct. Check that the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings are correct. Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is not greater than the running frequency. Check that frequency settings of each running frequency (such as multi-speed operation) are not zero. Check that especially the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting is not zero.
4) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not too heavy. Check that the shaft is not locked.
Check that the Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting. Check that the Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction setting is correct during the encoder feedback control. When "REV" is lit on the operation panel under the forward rotation command, set "1" in Pr.359.
Check that the voltage/current input switch is correctly set for analog input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA).
Check that the operation location by Pr. 550 and Pr. 551 is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
4.6.2 Motor generates abnormal noise
Check for any mechanical looseness. Contact the customer support of the motor manufacturer.
4.6.3 Motor generates heat abnormally Is the fan for the motor is running? (Check for accumulated dust.) Check that the load is not too heavy. Lighten the load. Check that the inverter output voltages (U, V, W) balanced. Was the motor type set? Check the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor. When using any FR-B3 series, perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 54.)
123
Check first when you have a trouble
4
TR O
U B
LE SH
O O
TI N
G
4.6.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct. Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly. (Refer to page 63)
4.6.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.) Check that the Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings are correct Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use shielded cables) Check that the load is not too heavy. Check that the Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are correct.
4.6.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short. Check that the load is not too heavy.
4.6.7 Motor current is large Check that the load is not too heavy.
4.6.8 Speed does not increase Check that the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting is correct. Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavier in winter.) $$Check that brake resistor is not connected between terminal P and P1 by mistake.
3) Others
4.6.9 Speed varies during operation
1) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not varying. 2) Check the input signals
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying. Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise. Input filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74 Input filter time constant. Check for a malfunction due to undesirable currents when the transistor output unit is connected. (Refer to page 23)
For the FR-B3 series, perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual Check that the wiring length is not too long for V/F control.(FR-B series only)
When the FR-B3 series, encoder feedback control is exercised, the output frequency varies with load fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault.
124
Check first when you have a trouble
4.6.10 Operation mode is not changed properly
1) Inspection of load Check that the STF or STR signal is off. When it is on, the operation mode cannot be changed.
2) Parameter setting Check the Pr. 79 setting. When the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial value), the inverter is placed in the External operation mode at input power-on. At this time, press on the operation panel (press
when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) to switch to the PU operation mode. For the other values (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is limited accordingly.
If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
Check that the operation location by Pr. 550 and Pr. 551 is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
4.6.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating Check that the operation panel is connected to the inverter securely.
4.6.12 POWER lamp is not lit Check that wiring is securely performed and installation is correct.
4.6.13 Parameter write cannot be performed Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the External operation mode.
Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection. Check that the operation location by Pr. 550 and Pr. 551 is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied))
125
Inspection item
5
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
Precautions for maintenance and inspection For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/ of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester, etc.
5.1 Inspection item
5.1.1 Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation. (1) Motor operation fault (2) Improper installation environment (3) Cooling system fault (4) Unusual vibration and noise (5) Unusual overheat and discoloration During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester.
5.1.2 Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. Consult us for periodic inspection. 1) Check for cooling system fault ................ Clean the air filter, etc. 2) Tightening check and retightening .......... The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc. Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 14)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage. 4) Measure insulation resistance. 5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
126
Inspection item
5.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection
*1 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter. *2 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
A re
a of
In
sp ec
tio n
Inspection Item Description
Interval Corrective Action at Alarm Occurrence
Cu st
om er
's
Ch ec
k
D ai
ly
Pe rio
di c
*2
General
Surrounding environment
Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity, dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist , etc Improve emvironment
Overall unit Check for unusual vibration and noise Check alarm location and retighten
Power supply voltage
Check that the main circuit voltages and control voltages are normal *1 Inspect the power supply
Main circuit
General
(1)Check with megger (across main circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminal). Contact the manufacturer
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts. Retighten (3)Check for overheat traces on the parts. Contact the manufacturer (4)Check for stain Clean
Conductors, cables (1)Check conductors for distortion. (2)Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer
Transformer/reactor Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase in whining sound.
Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Terminal block Check for damage. Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor
(1)Check for liquid leakage. Contact the manufacturer (2)Check for safety valve projection and bulge. Contact the manufacturer (3)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
main circuit capacitor (Refer to page 127)
Relay/contactor Check that the operation is normal and no chatter is heard. Contact the manufacturer
Resistor (1)Check for crack in resistor insulation. Contact the manufacturer (2)Check for a break in the cable. Contact the manufacturer
Control circuit
protective circuit
Operation check
(1)Check that the output voltages across phases with the inverter operated alone is balanced Contact the manufacturer
(2)Check that no fault is found in protective and display circuits in a sequence protective operation test.
Contact the manufacturer
P ar
ts c
he ck
Overall (1)Check for unusual odor and discoloration. Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer. (2)Check for serious rust development Contact the manufacturer
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor
(1)Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and deformation trance Contact the manufacturer
(2)Visual check and judge by the life check of the control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 127.)
Cooling system
Cooling fan (1)Check for unusual vibration and noise. Replace the fan (2)Check for loose screws and bolts Retighten (3)Check for stain Clean
Heatsink (1)Check for clogging Clean (2)Check for stain Clean
Air filter, etc. (1)Check for clogging Clean or replace (2)Check for stain Clean or replace
Display Indication
(1)Check that display is normal. Contact the manufacturer (2)Check for stain Clean
Meter Check that reading is normal Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Load motor Operation check Check for vibration and abnormal increase in
operation noise Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
127
Inspection item
5
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
5.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the inrush current limit circuit is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (2) is not performed. (Refer to page 128.)
(1) Display of the life alarm Pr. 255 Life alarm status display can be used to confirm that the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor,
cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level.
Parts Judgement Level Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity Control circuit capacitor Estimated 10% life remaining Inrush current limit circuit Estimated 10% life remaining (Power on: 100,000 times left) Cooling fan Less than 40% of the predetermined speed
Pr. 255 (decimal)
Bit (binary)
Inrush Current Limit Circuit Life
Cooling Fan Life
Main Circuit Capacitor Life
Control Circuit Capacitor Life
15 1111 14 1110 13 1101 12 1100 11 1011 10 1010 9 1001 8 1000 7 0111 6 0110 5 0101 4 0100 3 0011 2 0010 1 0001 0 0000
: with alarm, : without alarm
POINT
Life check of the main circuit capacitor needs to be done by Pr. 259. (Refer to the following.)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
1
15bit 7 0
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life
bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Pr.255 read
Bit image is displayed
in decimal
Pr.255 setting read
128
Inspection item
(2) Measuring method of life of the main circuit capacitor If the value of capacitor capacity measured before shipment is considered as 100%, Pr. 255 bit1 is turned on when
the measured value falls below 85%. Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the
capacitor capacity. 1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop. 2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259 3) Switch power off. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
inverter is off. 4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is off, power on again. 5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, then read Pr .258 and check the life of the main circuit capacitor.
5.1.5 Cleaning Always run the inverter in a clean status. When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
5.1.6 Replacement of parts The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices. The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically. Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
*1 Replacement years for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40C (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
*2 Output current : 80% of the inverter rated current
REMARKS When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error"
(Pr. 259 = "9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1"). When measuring, avoid the following conditions to perform. In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3") is confirmed under the following conditions, normal measurement can not be done. (a) MT-HC or MT-RC is connected. (b) Terminal R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminals P/+ and N/. (c) Switch power on during measuring. (d) The motor is not connected to the inverter. (e) The motor is running.(The motor is coasting.) (f) The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity. (g) The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is off. (h) The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal. (i) The start command is given while measuring.
Operating environment:Surrounding air temperature (annual average 40C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)) Output current (80% of the inverter rated current)
POINT
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3h passed since the turn off of the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.
WARNING When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering off to prevent an electric shock.
CAUTION Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off. The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
Part Name Standard Replacement Interval *1 Description Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required)
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years *2 Replace (as required) On-board smoothing capacitor 10 years Replace the board (as required)
Relays as required
CAUTION For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
129
Inspection item
5
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
(1) Cooling fan The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
CAUTION For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
Inverter Type Fan Type Units FR-B FR-B3
200V
1500 to 3700 (N)1500 to (N)3700 MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1 5.5K to 11K (N)5.5K to (N)11K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2 15K (N)15K to 18.5K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
22K (N)22K MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1 MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
30K to 55K (N)30K, (N)37K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 2 75K - MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 3
400V
2200, 3700 (N)H2200, (N)H3700 MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1 7.5K, 15K (N)H5.5K to (N)H15K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2 22K (N)H18.5K, (N)H22K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
- (N)H30K MMF-09D24TS-RP1 BKO-CA1640H01 2 37K, 55K (N)H37K
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 2
75K, 110K - 3 FR-B-750, FR-B3-(N)400, 750, FR-B3-(N)H400 to 1500
Removal (FR-B-1500 to 75K(200V), FR-B-2200 to 110K(400V), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 37K, FR-B3-(N)H2200 to 37K) 1)Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
2)Disconnect the fan connectors. 3)Remove the fan.
FR-B-1500 to 3700(200V) FR-B-2200, 3700(400V) FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
FR-B-5.5K to 22K(200V) FR-B-7.5K to 22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 22K
FR-B-30K or more(200V/400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)30K or more
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity. (Refer to the table above)
FR-B-1500 to 3700(200V) FR-B-2200, 3700(400V) FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
FR-B-5.5K to 22K(200V) FR-B-7.5K to 22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 22K
FR-B-30K or more(200V/400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)30K or more
Fan cover Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan
Fan Fan
Fan connection
connector
Fan connection
connector
Fan connection
connector
* *
130
Inspection item
Reinstallation (FR-B-1500 to 75K(200V), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 37K, FR-B-2200 to 110K(400V), FR-B3-(N)H2200 to 37K) 1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
2) Reconnect the fan connectors. When wiring, avoid the cables being caught by the fan.
3)Reinstall the fan cover.
AIR FLOW
CAUTION Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
FR-B-5.5 to 11K(200V), FR-B-5.5K to 15K(400V) FR-B3-(N)5.5K to 11K, FR-B3-(N)H5.5K to 15KFR-B-1500 to 3700(200V), FR-B-2200, 3700(400V)
FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700, FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
FR-B-22K(200V) FR-B3-(N)22K
FR-B-15K(200V), FR-B-22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)15K, 18.5K, FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
FR-B-30K(200V) or more, FR-B-30K(400V) or more, FR-B3-(N)30K or more, FR-B3-(N)H30K or more
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click
sound.
1. Insert hooks into
holes.
FR-B-1500 to 3700(200V), FR-B-2200, 3700(400V)
FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700, FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click
sound.
1. Insert hooks into
holes.
FR-B-5.5K to 22K(200V), FR-B-7.5K to 22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 22K
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click
sound.
1. Insert hooks into
holes.
FR-B-30K or more(200V/400V), FR-B3-(N)(H)30K or more
131
Inspection item
5
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
(3) Smoothing capacitors A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc. The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and operating conditions. When the inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years. The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows: 1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion 2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack. 3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
Refer to page 128 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor. (4) Relays To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times (switching life).
5.1.7 Inverter replacement
The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring cover of the inverter. 1)Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2)Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws.
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement. After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the original position.
CAUTION Before starting inverter replacement, switch power off, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester and such to ensure safety.
Top cover
132
FR-B Series Specifications
6 SPECIFICATIONS 6.1 FR-B Series Specifications
6.1.1 FR-B series ratings FR-B series (suitable for inverter drive variable-torque explosion-proof type motor)
200V class
400V class
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Pressure-resistant, explosion-Proof motor. The motors are XE-(N)E, XF-(N)E and TH series.
*2 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class. *3 The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. *4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about that of the power supply. *5 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). *6 When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00). *7 FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
Type FR-B- 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1
60Hz standard variable-torque 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75
50Hz standard variable-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 75
60Hz standard constant-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
60Hz standard constant-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 34 44 55 67 82 110 Rated current (A) 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 90 115 145 175 215 288 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Three-phase 200V
Regenerative braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty
150% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 2%ED
20% torque/continuous 10%
torque/ continuous
P ow
er s
up pl
y Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 200V 50Hz, 200/220V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 180 to 220V 50Hz, 180 to 242V 60Hz Permissible frequency fluctuation 5% Power supply capacity (kVA) *5
Variable-torque type 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 41 52 66 80 100 110 Constant-torque type - 1.5 - 2.2 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed type (IP20) *6 Open type (IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 2.3 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 13.0 14.0 23.0 35.0 35.0 58.0 70.0
Type FR-B- 750 1500 2200 3700 7.5K 15K 22K 37K 55K 75K 90K 110K
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1
60Hz standard variable-torque 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
50Hz standard variable-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75 90 110
60Hz standard constant-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 75 90
60Hz standard constant-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45 55 75
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 13 23.6 32.8 54 84 110 137 165 Rated current (A) 2.5 4 6 9 17 31 44 71 110 144 180 216 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Three-phase 380V to 440V Regenerative braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty
100% torque/ 2%ED 20% torque/continuous 10% torque/
continuous
Po w
er s
up pl
y Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 400V 50Hz, 400/440V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 360 to 440V 50Hz, 360 to 484V 60Hz Permissible frequency fluctuation 5% Power supply capacity (kVA) *5
Variable-torque type 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 41 52 66 100 144 180 216 Constant-torque type - 1.5 - 4.5 5.5 - 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 100 144 180
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed typ (IP20) *6 Open type (IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 7.5 13.0 35.0 37.0 50.0 57.0 72.0
2
133
FR-B Series Specifications
6
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
6.1.2 FR-B series common specifications
*1 Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted *2 Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07). *3 Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04). *4 Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc. *5 This protective function does not function in the initial status.
C on
tro l s
pe ci
fic at
io ns
Control method Sine wave PWN control (V/F constant control) Output frequency range 0.2 to 120Hz (22K or less), 0.2 to 60Hz (30K or more)
Frequency setting resolution
Analog input 0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to 5V/11bit)
Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency accuracy
Analog input Within 0.2% of the max. output frequency (25C10C) Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Base frequency is always 50Hz Acceleration/deceleration time setting
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake Operation at 3Hz (fixed) is selectable Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
O pe
ra tio
n sp
ec ifi
ca tio
ns
Frequency setting signal
Analog input Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
Digital input Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Input signals
You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (MT-HC connection), MT-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal, PID control enable terminal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load torque high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, pre- excitation, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding operation permission, and DC feeding operation cancel.
Pulse train input 100kpps
Operational functions
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, electronic bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure, stop-on- contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, regeneration avoidance, operation mode selection, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485).
O ut
pu t s
ig na
ls
Operating status
You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake pre-alarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, orientation complete*1, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, fault output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average value monitor, maintenance timer fault, remote output, forward rotation output*1, reverse rotation output*1, low speed output, alarm output and fault output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
When used with the FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR (option)
In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of the FR-A7AR)
Pulse train output 50kpps
Pulse/analog output
You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set point, PID measured value, motor output.
In di
ca tio
n PU (FR-DU07/ FR-PU07/ FR-PU04)
Operating status
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed,motor torque, overload, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor*2, output terminal option monitor*2, option fitting status*3, terminal assignment status*3, feed back pulse*1.
Fault definition Fault definition is displayed during the fault occurs, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs and past 8 fault definitions are stored.
Interactive guidance Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function*3
Protective/warning function
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase loss*5, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase loss, external thermal relay operation*5, PTC thermistor operation*5, option fault, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess*5, CPU alarm, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess*5, inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm (inverter), USB communication fault, error, analog input fault, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake pre-alarm*5, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*2*5, brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm.
En vi
ro nm
en t Surrounding air temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing) Storage temperature*4 -20C to +65C Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.) Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes).
134
FR-B3 Series Specifications
6.2 FR-B3 Series Specifications
6.2.1 FR-B3 series ratings
FR-B3 series (suitable for inverter drive constant-torque explosion-proof type motor)
200V class
400V class
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Pressure-resistant, explosion-Proof motor. For FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K, the motors are XF-(N)ECA-2 series. For FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K, the motors are XF-(N)ECA-1 series.
*2 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class. *3 The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. *4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about that of the power supply. *5 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). *6 When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00). *7 FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
Type FR-B3-(N)- 400 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 29 34 44 55 Rated current (A) 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Output according to a pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor Regenerative braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty
150% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 2%ED
20% torque/continuous
P ow
er s
up pl
y
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 200V 50Hz, 200/220V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 180 to 220V 50Hz, 180 to 242V 60Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) *5 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed type (IP20)*6 Open type
(IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 1.9 2.3 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 13.0 13.0 14.0 23.0 35.0
Type FR-B3-(N)H- 400 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 17.5 23.6 29 32.8 43.4 54 Rated current (A) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Output according to a pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor Regenerative braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty 100% torque/2%ED 20% torque/continuous
P ow
er s
up pl
y
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 400V 50Hz,400/440V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 360 to 440V 50Hz, 360 to 484V 60Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) *5 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed type (IP20)*6 Open type
(IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 13.0 13.0 23.0 35.0
2
135
FR-B3 Series Specifications
6
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
6.2.2 FR-B3 series common specifications
*1 Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted *2 Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07). *3 Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04). *4 Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc. *5 This protective function does not function in the initial status.
C on
tro l s
pe ci
fic at
io ns
Control method Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among, Advanced magnetic flux vector control). Output frequency range 0.2 to 120Hz
Frequency setting resolution
Analog input 0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to 5V/11bit)
Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency accuracy
Analog input Within 0.2% of the max. output frequency (25C10C) Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Constant-torque up to 60Hz, constant output from 60Hz to the maximum frequency (When the rated motor frequency is set to 60Hz) Starting torque 200% 0.3Hz (0.4K to 3.7K), 150% 0.3Hz (5.5K or more) Acceleration/deceleration time setting
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 400% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
O pe
ra tio
n sp
ec ifi
ca tio
ns
Frequency setting signal
Analog input Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
Digital input Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Input signals
You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV connection), FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal , external DC injection brake operation start, PID control enable terminal, brake opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load torque high- speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover and command source switchover.
Pulse train input 100kpps
Operational functions
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure, stop-on-contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485).
O ut
pu t s
ig na
ls
Operating status
You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake pre-alarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average value monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output*1, reverse rotation output*1, low speed output, torque detection, minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
When used with the FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR (option)
In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of the FR-A7AR)
Pulse train output 50kpps
Pulse/analog output
You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor torque, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set point, PID measured value, motor output, torque command, torque current command, and torque monitor.
In di
ca tio
n PU (FR-DU07/ FR-PU07/ FR-PU04)
Operating status
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, overload, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor*2, output terminal option monitor*2, option fitting status*3, terminal assignment status*3, motor output
Alarm definition Alarm definition is displayed during the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the protection function was activated and past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive guidance Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function*3
Protective/warning function
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase loss*5, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase loss, external thermal relay operation*5, PTC thermistor operation*5, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess*5, CPU alarm, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess*5, inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm (inverter), USB communication fault, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake pre-alarm*5, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*2*5, brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm, signal loss detection*1*5, overspeed*1*5, brake sequence error*5, encoder phase error*1*5,.
En vi
ro nm
en t Surrounding air temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing) Storage temperature*4 -20C to +65C Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.) Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes).
136
Outline dimension drawings
6.3 Outline dimension drawings 6.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings
FR-B-750 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)400, 750
FR-B-1500 to 3700 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR-B-750 to 3700 (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
2-6 hole
2 6
0
2 4
5
7 .5
6
110 D 5
7 .5
95
D 1
Inverter Type D D1 FR-B3-(N)400 110 21 FR-B-750, FR-B3-(N)750 125 36
2 6
0
150
144
125
4 5
.5
6
140 57
.5 7
.5 2
4 5
2-6 hole
* The FR-B-750,1500, FR-B3-(N)H 400 to 1500 are not provided with a cooling fan.
137
Outline dimension drawings
6
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
FR-B-5.5K to 11K(200V class), FR-B3-(N)5.5K to 11K FR-B-7.5K,15K(400V class), FR-B3-(N)H5.5K to 15K
FR-B-15K,22K(200V class), FR-B3-(N)15K to 22K FR-B-22K(400V class), FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
H 1 H
D 1
D
2-6 hole
7 .5
220
195
211
106
7 .5
Inverter Type H H1 D D1 FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K (200V), FR-B-7.5K (400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K
260 245 170 84
FR-B-11K(200V), FR-B-15K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)11K, 15K
300 285 190 101.5
10 230 250
3 8
0 1
0 1
0
4 0
0
190 10.5
1 0
1 .5
250
2-10 hole
138
Outline dimension drawings
FR-B-30K to 55K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)30K, 37K FR-B-37K, 55K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H30K, 37K
FR-B-75K, 90K (400V class)
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
W2
W
W1
H 1
H
H 2
1 0
D
3.2
2-d hole
Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 H2 d D FR-B-30K (200V/400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)30K 325 270 10 550 530 10 10 195
FR-B-37K, 45K (200V), FR-B-37K, 55K (400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)37K 435 380 12 550 525 15 12 250
FR-B-55K (200V) 465 410 12 700 675 15 12 250
300
3.2
465
400
2-12hole
6 2
0
5 9
5 1
0 1
5
(for M6 screw) 4-installation hole
(for M6 screw) Earth (ground) terminal
Rating plate 2-terminal
E
P1 P P1, P
(for M12 bolt)
Within D
W1
H 1
H 1 0
W 2
DC Reactor Type
W W1 H H1 D Mass (Kg)
FR-HEL-H75K (FR-B-75K)
140 120 320 295 185 16
FR-HEL-H90K (FR-B-90K)
150 130 340 310 190 20
DC reactor supplied
139
Outline dimension drawings
6
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
FR-B-75K (200V class) FR-B-110K (400V class)
DC reactor supplied
(Unit: mm)
360
7 1
5 7
4 0
465 400
1 0
1 5
3.2
2-12 hole
DC Reactor Type W W1 H H1 D S Mass (kg) FR-HEL-75K (FR-B-75K) 150 130 340 310 190 M6 17 FR-HEL-H110K (FR-B-110K) 150 130 340 310 195 M6 22
E
P1
P
P1
P
W1
Within D(for S screw)
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Earth (ground) terminal
Rating plate
(for M12 bolt)
2-terminal
H 1
H 1 0
W 2
140
Outline dimension drawings
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
(Unit: mm)
Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
(Unit: mm)
2-M3 screw
Air- bleeding hole
78
5 0
4 4
723 3
81
3 3
16
25
3.2max
72
4 4
21
20
2 2
Panel
Cable
FR-DU07
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP) (option)
27.8
6
80.3
(14.2) 2
.5 5
0 (11.45)
25.05
1 3
5
83
*1
*1
*1
*1
6 7
5 1
40
5 6 .8
5 7 .8
26.5
4-R1
(Effective depth of the
instllation screw hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
26.5
40
Air-bleeding hole
4-4 hole
*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for fixing the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws threads.
141
For customers who are replacing the older model with this inverter
APPENDICES
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-B,B3 series (A500 specifications) (1) Instructions for installation
1)Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (With screws.) Please note. (Refer to page 5.) 2)Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (With screws.) Please note. (Refer to page 5.) 3)Plug-in options of the B,B3 series (A500 specifications) are not compatible 4)Operation panel (FR-DU04) can not be used. 5)Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP/FR-SW1-SETUP) can not be used.
(2) Wiring instructions 1)The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications) without removing
wiring. Note that the wiring cover (400 to 22K) is not compatible.
(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications) can not be used with the FR-B, B3 series (A500 specifications) terminals.)
(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit) 1)For the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications), many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting
these parameters, the parameter name and setting range are not displayed. User initial value list and user clear of the HELP function can not be used.
2)For the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications), many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all faults are displayed as "Fault 14". When the faults history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added faults display will not appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting can not be used. 4) User registration/clear (user group 2) can not be used. 5) Parameter copy/verification function can not be used.
Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the older model with this inverter
FR-B, B3 series (A500 specifications)
FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications)
142
For customers who are replacing the older model with this inverter
(4) Main differences between the explosion proof inverter and standard inverter
Specifications FR-B3-(N) (FR-A700 specifications) FR-A700 Power supply
voltage 200V class 200V 50Hz 200/220V 60Hz 200V to 220V 50Hz 200V to 240V 60Hz 400V class 400V 50Hz 400/440V 60Hz 380 to 480V 50/60Hz
Maximum output frequency Limit according to the maximum operating frequency of the motor 400Hz
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Available (Advanced magnetic flux vector control operation is required) Available
Real sensorless vector control Not available Available
Energy saving control selection Not available (due to Advanced magnetic flux vector control) Available
PWM frequency Two types, standard(2kHz)/law noise (14.5kHz), are available Law noise(Variable)
143
MEMO
144
REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
For Maximum Safety Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life. When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised to install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product are likely to cause a serious accident.
Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.
Print Date *Manual Number Revision Apr., 2006 IB(NA)-0600271ENG-A First edition Feb., 2009 IB(NA)-0600271ENG-B
Pr. 653 Speed smoothing control (FR-B series) P
Related manuals for Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the FR-B-750-400V Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2 on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Mitsubishi FR-B-750-400V as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi FR-B-750-400V. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-750-400V Inverter Instruction Manual V2 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.